SIVACON LV56 Complete English 2011 PDF

Siemens AG 2012
Power Distribution Boards SIVACON S4

Catalogue LV 56 2011
SIVACON
Answers for infrastructure.
Siemens AG 2012
Related catalogs
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10.1 Electrical Installation Technology SENTRON Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring Devices E86060-K8250-A101-A2-7600 Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology SIVACON Switchboards and Distribution Systems E86060-K8260-A101-A2-7600 SIVACON LV 56 Power Distribution Boards SIVACON S4 LV 10.2
Contents
Air circuit breakers Molded case circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers Residual current protective devices Fuse systems Overvoltage protection devices Switch disconnectors Switching devices Transformers, bells and socket outlets Busbar systems Measuring devices and power management Monitoring devices Software
Switchboards Busbar trunking systems System cubicles and cubicle lighting Cubicle air-conditioning Distribution boards Terminal blocks
Power distribution boards Standard configurations Cubicles, supporting structure and enclosure Busbar systems Assembly kits for protection and switching devices Covers, modular doors, mounting plates and 19" racks Internal separation System air-conditioning Accessories
E86060-K1856-A101-A1-7600 SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems CD-K, BD01, BD2 up to 1250 A LV 70 Busbar Trunking Systems, Overview CD-K System (25 A ... 40 A) BD 01 System (40 A ... 160 A) BD2 System (160 A ... 1250 A)
E86060-K1870-A101-A6-7600 Products for Automation and Drives Interactive Catalog CA 01 All products of automation, drives and installation technology, including those in the catalogs listed above.
DVD: E86060-D4001-A510-D1-7600 Industry Mall Information and Ordering Platform in the Internet: All products of automation, drives and installation technology, including those in the catalogs listed above.
www.siemens.com/industrymall Catalog PDF Internet: All catalogs for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation technology can be downloaded as PDF files.
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial
Trademarks
All product designations may be registered trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. Third parties using these trademarks or product names for their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. Further information about low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation is available on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/industrymall
Siemens LV 56 2011
Technical Support
Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems.
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
Siemens AG 2012
Introduction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SIVACON Power Distribution Boards SIVACON S4

Catalogue LV 56 2011
System Overview
Standard Configurations
Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure Busbar Systems
The products and systems listed in this catalogue are developed and manufactured using a VDE-approved quality management system according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2000.
Assembly Kits for Protection and Switching Devices Covers, Modular Doors, Mounting Plates and 19" Racks Internal Separation
SIVACON 8MR System Air-Conditioning
Accessories
With commercial data valid in Germany from November 2011 Supersedes: Catalogue LV 56 2008 Refer to the Industry Mall for current updates of this catalogue: www.siemens.com/industrymall The products in this catalogue can also be found in the interactive catalogue CA 01. Order No.: E86060-D4001-A510-D1-7600 Contact your local Siemens sales office for further information. Siemens AG 2012
Mechanical Dimensions
Planning and Configuration
Appendix
Siemens AG 2012
The right one for everyone Our portfolio includes switchboards, busbar trunking systems, distribution boards, protection, switching, measuring and monitoring devices, building management systems, switches and socket outlets. All over the world, the universality, modularity and intelligence of our components and systems give you innumerable benefits all the time they are in use. Developed according to the respective international standards, we offer forwardlooking design with innovative functions and ensure the highest quality standards worldwide.
Sustainability in focus As a worldwide leader in the provision of high-quality, standards-compliant products and systems for low-voltage power distribution, we contribute to the sustainable and responsible handling of electrical energy. With our integrated portfolio of energy saving and distribution through short circuit protection and overload protection through to energy management, we support the implementation of environmentally friendly energy concepts on the basis of wind power, photovoltaics, intelligent buildings and electromobility.
1/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Universal, safe and intelligent power distribution

Whether in industrial plants, in infrastructure or in buildings: Each technical plant depends on the reliable supply of electricity. Even a short outage can have grave consequences. We offer the best technology for the responsible use of electrical energy and at the same time help to protect people and property and to conserve natural resources. We are happy to help you with comprehensive support from the initial information through to operation. Take a closer look at all the options available from Siemens.
Everything for power distribution Consistent solutions are required for electric power distribution in buildings. Our answer is Totally Integrated Power (TIP). TIP stands for innovative products, systems and software tools which ensure the safe and reliable distribution of electric power. They are supplemented by communication-capable circuit breakers and modules which connect the power distribution system to the building automation system or industrial automation solutions. These in turn can be linked to a comprehensive energy management system which contributes to optimising the consumption of electricity and hence to lowering the costs of operation.
Excellent support As a competent and reliable partner, we also offer you comprehensive support from the initial information, through planning, configuring and ordering to commissioning, operation and technical support. We know the needs of your working environment and your daily business. Based on this, we give you flexible and high quality support, which allows you to concentrate fully on your customers and their needs.
Siemens LV 56 2011
1/3
Siemens AG 2012
Much more than a catalogue. The Industry Mall.

You have a catalogue in your hands that will serve you well for selecting and ordering your products. But have you heard of the electronic online catalogue (the Industry Mall) and all its benefits? Take a look around it sometime: www.siemens.com/industrymall
Selecting Find your products in the structure tree, in the new "Bread-crumb" navigation or with the integral search machine with expert functions. Electronic configurators are also integrated into the Mall. Enter the various characteristic values and the appropriate product will be displayed with the relevant order numbers. You can save configurations, load them and reset them to their initial status. Ordering You can load the products that you have selected in this way into the shopping basket at a click of the mouse. You can create your own templates and you will be informed about the availability of the products in your shopping basket. You can load the completed parts lists directly into Excel or Word. Delivery status When you have sent the order, you will receive a short e-mail confirmation which you can print out or save. With a click on "Carrier", you will be directly connected to the website of the carrier where you can easily track the delivery status. Added value due to additional information So you have found your product and want more information about it? In just a few clicks of the mouse, you will arrive at the image data base, manuals and operating instructions. Create your own user documentation with My Documentation Manager. Also available are FAQs, software downloads, certificates and technical data sheets as well as our training programs. In the image database you will find, depending on the product, 2D/3D graphics, dimension drawings and exploded drawings, characteristic curves or circuit diagrams which you can download. Convinced? We look forward to your visit!
1/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview
2/2 2/6 2/7 Introduction
2
Technical specifications Declaration of conformity
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview 2
Introduction
Overview
NSW0_00980
SIVACON S4 is a switchgear and controlgear system, type tested (with design verification) according to IEC 61439-1/2 and EN 61439-1/2, for infrastructural power supply applications in administrative and utility buildings, in industrial and service sector facilities, as well as in public buildings such as schools and hospitals. The concept of the SIVACON S4 low-voltage power distribution board is characterised by a high level of personal and machine safety.
SIVACON S4 low-voltage power distribution boards are constructed according to a modular design system. Thanks to the use of requirement-based, standardised and series-produced assembly kits and the wide range of possible combinations offered by SIVACON S4 modular technology, all needs in connection with low-voltage power distribution can be optimally met.
2/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview
Introduction
System SIVACON S4 is a system of low-voltage power distribution boards for indoor use, panelled on four sides by sheet steel, suitable for self-standing or wall-mounted installation. The cubicle The cubicle framework is constructed from height, width and depth profiles. This provides the bearing structure supporting all built-in and add-on components. Use of Sendzimir-galvanised frame profiles and self-tapping screws creates a mechanically highly stable construction with safe earthing of the built-in components. The enclosure The enclosure parts enable versions in degrees of protection IP30/31, IP40/41 or IP55. The enclosure parts are coated with RAL7035 powder-paint. In addition to the standard two-way interlocking system, the doors can be equipped with numerous types of operating mechanism including rotary handles, with or without locks, to meet any need. Assembly kit covers are secured by means of captive quick-release screws. Opening and closing is by rotating the handle by 1/4 turn. Using the hinge option, the covers may be swung open. Busbar systems The main busbar system of SIVACON S4 offers an appropriate scaling of rated currents up to 4000 A, matched to the rated currents and short-circuit currents of standard transformers. It is possible to set up power systems such as TN-C, TN-S, IT and TT. Vertical distribution busbar systems are available as cascaded versions up to 1600 A or non-cascaded versions up to 2700 A.
NSW0_00981
Internal separation Depending on individual requirements, internal separations is available from form 1 to form 4. Assembly kits A service-proven and coordinated range of assembly kits is available for SENTRON protection, switching, measuring and monitoring devices. Depth-adjustable modular and section-high mounting plates, covers with or without cut-outs, and cubicle airconditioning components round off the assembly kit range.
Siemens LV 56 2011
2/3
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview 2
Introduction
Benefits
Features at a glance Controlgear assembly design-tested in accordance with IEC 61439-1/2 and EN 61439-1/2 Modular system supplied as a flat pack (supplied as assembly kits with packaged individual and standard components, including assembly instructions for do-it-yourself installation) Attractive design, innovative ventilation and closing system Colour RAL 7035 Doors with universal stop Degree of protection IP30, IP31, IP40, IP41 and IP55 Busbar systems up to 4000 A, Icw up to 100 kA (1 s), Ipk up to 220 kA Cubicle height 2000 mm Base height 100 mm or 200 mm Cubicle width 350 mm, 400 mm, 600 mm, 800 mm, 850 mm, 1000 mm or 1200 mm Cubicle depth 400, 600 or 800 mm Assembly kits for SENTRON safety, switching, measuring and monitoring devices Assembly kits for copper connection modules for 3WL air circuit breakers and 3VL moulded case circuit breakers Internal separation form 1, 2, 3 and 4 Easy design and configuration with the SIMARIS CFB software tool Construction and testing modalities Switchgear engineers must observe the manufacturer's construction and mounting instructions when constructing and mounting the low-voltage switchboard. The installation and individual testing of the low-voltage boards must be performed according to IEC 61439-1/2 and EN 61439-1/2. Protection of the environment To the best of our knowledge, our products do not contain any materials in concentrations or applications whose placing on the market in products is prohibited by the current requirements of Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS). All the materials used are recyclable.
NSW0_00983
2/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview
Introduction
6 13 11 8 15
14 7 10 12
16
17
i201_18369
18
2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
Frame Base corner pieces, with front covers Lateral base covers Supporting structure Top plate Side panel with design part
7 Glazed door in Giugiaro design 8 Cover frame 9 Cover in front of 200 mm wide functional compartment 10 Covers for assembly kits 11 Partition for main busbar system 12 Partition for vertical distribution busbars
13 Main busbars 14 Vertical distribution busbar system non-cascaded 15 Rear panel 16 Mounting plate for switching devices 17 Bottom plate 18 PE busbars
Siemens LV 56 2011
2/5
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview 2
Technical specifications
Overview
Standards and regulations Air clearance and creepage distances Design-tested low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Overvoltage category Pollution degree IEC 61439-1/2, EN 61439-1/2 12 kV IV 3 1, 2b, 3b, 4a, 4b 1000 V Up to 690 V 50/60 Hz Rated current Rated peak withstand current (Ipk) Rated short-time withstand current (Icw) Rated utilisation voltage Rated short-time alternating current Length of internal arc without extra kit Length of internal arc with extra kit Sendzimir-galvanised Epoxy polyester resin Iron phosphating Thickness of coating According to IEC 61140, EN 61140 According to IEC 60529, EN 60529 According to IEC 62262, Paragraph 9.6 Up to 4000 A Up to 220 kA Up to 100 kA, 1s 400 V 50 kA 100 ms 300 ms Min. 20 m RAL 7035 Min. 70 m 1 IP30, IP31, IP40, IP41, IP55 IP3X, IK08 IP4X, IK10 1.0 kg 5.0 kg 0.5 kg 1.0 kg 2.0 kg 0.0 kg 2.5 kg Width 400 mm, 600 mm Width 800 mm Width 1000 mm, 1200 mm Height 150-200 mm Height 250-350 mm Height 400-800 mm 10.0 kg 5.0 kg 2.5 kg 0.5 kg 1.5 kg 3.0 kg 10.0 kg 1200 kg
Internal separation Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operating voltage (Ue) Rated frequency Rated current (In) of (3-pole and 4-pole) busbar system Main horizontal bars Protection of people in the event of internal arcs Type tested according to IEC 61641, without glazed door Surface treatment Cubicle, interior components, enclosure Enclosure parts
Insulation class Degree of protection Resistance to mechanical impacts Additional static loads on frame components Front frame Cover
Swivel Fixed With quick-closing screws, height 50-300 mm With quick-closing screws, height 350-550 mm With quick-closing screws, height 600-800 mm With hinges
Inner door Internal door/double door
Modular door
Outer front cover Max. construction weight According to IEC 62208, Paragraph 9.3, 9.4, type tested with static load by lifting a cubicle Operating conditions Ambient temperature1) Installation altitude Frame parts Dimensions Exterior dimensions Height in mm Width in mm Depth in mm Height in mm
35 C 2000 m 2.5 mm sheet steel, with 25 mm hole pattern according to DIN 43660 2000 350, 400, 600, 800, 850, 1000, 1200 400, 600, 800 100, 200
Base
1)
For different ambient temperatures and installation altitudes, take into account the appropriate correction factors (see chapter 12 "Planning and Configuration")
2/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview
Declaration of conformity
Overview
Siemens LV 56 2011
2/7
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview 2
2/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview
Siemens LV 56 2011
2/9
Siemens AG 2012
System Overview 2
Notes
2/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
3/2
3
SIVACON S4 with 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, vertical distribution busbar on the side SIVACON S4 with 3WL circuit breakers SIVACON S4 cubicle type Economic with 3VL, vertical distribution busbar at the rear SIVACON S4 with protection and switching devices and modular devices
3/3
3/4
3/5
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
SIVACON S4 with 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, vertical distribution busbar on the side
Overview
Power distribution board data
Height Width Depth Height of base Degree of protection Main busbar system Distribution busbar system Front Internal separation mm mm 2000 1200 400 100 IP55 without cascaded 1250 A, 50 kA covers, section door 2b Starters
Assembly kits
Infeed 3VL 1250 moulded case circuit breaker, cable entry from top, terminals for cables, extended terminal covers 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, extended terminal covers, modular devices
Order No.
Quantity 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description
Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

8PQ1 202-4BA02 8PQ3 000-1BA38 8PQ3 000-1BA43 8PQ1 012-0BA01 8PQ1 010-4BA01 8PQ2 000-6BA04 8PQ2 197-2BA14 8PQ2 197-6BA14 8PQ2 197-4BA05 8PQ2 302-4BA04 8PQ2 306-4BA05 8PQ2 304-4BA05 8PQ2 302-4BA01 8PQ2 420-2BA01 8PQ2 520-4BA01 Cubicle H2000/W1200/D400 Bottom plate partition crossbar D400 Exterior intermediate supporting structure Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W1200 Base side covers H100/D400 Fixed front frame H1800/W600 Outer cover IP55/H1975/B200 IP55 glazed door/right/2-way interlock/H1975/W600 IP55 door/left/2-way interlock/H1975/W400 Bottom plate IP55/W200/D400 Bottom plate IP55/W600/D400 Bottom plate IP55/W400/D400 Top plate IP55/W1200/D400 Rear panel IP55/H2000/W1200 Side panel with design strip/H2000/D400 Support for distribution busbar, cascaded/30 30 Bare copper busbars L2000/30 10 Bare copper busbars L2000/30 5 Cover for 4 instruments and 1 switch, 72 72/H200/W600 Kit for 3VL7/3-pole,4-pole/vertical/fixed/H600/W600 Cover for 3VL7/3,4-pole/vertical/fixed/H600/W600 Cover H200/W600 Kit for modular device, single-row/24MW/W600 Cover for modular device, single-row/24MW/H150/W600 Kit for 3VL2-3/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/H200/W600 Cover for 3VL1-3/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/plugin/H200/W600 Kit for 3VL4/4-pole/horizontal/H250/W600 Cover for 3VL4/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/plug-in/H250/W600 Distribution busbar connection 3VL3/4-pole/horizontal/fixed Distribution busbar connection 3VL4/4-pole/horizontal/fixed Separation form 2b for distribution busbar H1900/D400 SIVACON - SIEMENS cubicle ID plate Cable anchoring brackets profile C30/D400 (600, 800) Flat head square screws DIN 603/M10 55 Hexagonal nuts ISO 4032/M10 Clamping washer DIN 6796/10 Busbar connection kit Cable, conductors, small parts, screws, nuts, washers with locking edges for cable connection
Busbar systems
i201_06793
8PQ4 000-0BA32 8PQ4 000-0BA86 8PQ4 000-0BA85 8PQ2 020-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA11 8PQ2 060-6BA03 8PQ2 020-6BA01 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ2 015-6BA07 8PQ6 000-3BA18 8PQ2 020-6BA04 8PQ6 000-2BA87 8PQ2 025-6BA02 8PQ6 000-1BA64 8PQ6 000-1BA66
Kits for protection and switching devices, covers, modular mounting plates
Kits for protection and switching devices, busbar connection
Internal separation
8PQ4 000-0BA06
i201_06795
Accessories
8PQ9 400-0BA06 8PQ3 000-0BA38 8PQ9 500-1BA36 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 400-0BA02
Busbar systems
i201_06794
3/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
SIVACON S4 with 3WL circuit breakers
Overview
Height Width Depth Height of base Degree of protection Main busbar system Distribution busbar system Front Internal separation mm mm 2000 2000 600 100 IP30 Standard at top, 3200 A, 65 kA Cascaded 2 1600 A Covers, cubicle panelling 4b
Assembly kits
Infeed/starters 3WL air circuit breakers, size II, fixed, connection to distribution busbar, cables from bottom/top, max. 12 cables per phase for M12 cable terminal
Order No.
Quan- Description tity 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 16 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 3 1 2 3 3 2 2 Cubicle H2000/W800/D600 Cubicle H2000/W400/D600 Interior side upright H1600/D600 Interior side upright H1800/D600,800 Board coupling kit Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W800 Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W400 Base side cover H100/D600 Fixed front frame H1600/W800 Outer cover IP4X/H1975/W400 Cubicle panelling IP3X/H1975/W800 Bottom plate IP55/W800/D600 Bottom plate IP4X/cable/W800/D600 Bottom plate IP55/W400/D600 Top plate IP4X/cable/W800/D600 Top plate IP4X/W800/D600 Top plate IP4X/W400/D600 Rear panel IP4X/H2000/W800 Rear panel IP4X/H2000/W400 Side panel with design strip/H2000/D600 Main busbars holder 3200 A Flying support (reinforcement) for busbar Support for earthing bar PE Support for distribution busbar, cascaded/30 x 40 Distribution busbar lugs/left/30 x 40/D600, 800 Bare copper busbars L2000/50 x 10 Bare copper busbars L2000/40 x 10 Bare copper busbars L2000/40 x 5 Kit for 3WL11,12/3,4-pole/H550/W800 Cover for 3WL12/4-pole/H550/W800 Cover H550/W800 Cover H500/W800 Distribution busbar connection 3WL1232/fixed/W800 Cable connection 3WL1232/fixed/W800 Separation form 2b, main busbars/W800/D600 Separation form 2b, distribution busbar H1900/D600 Separation form 2b, distribution busbar H1600/D600 Partition plug-in rail H1600 Separation form 3 3WL12/3,4-pole/pull-out/H550/W800 Separation form 4 3WL12/3,4-pole/distrib.busbar/W800 Separation form 4 3WL12/3,4-pole/cable/W800 Separation form 4 3WL12/3,4-pole/cable/W800 SIVACON - SIEMENS cubicle ID plate Busbar connection kit Flat head square screws DIN 603/M10 x 45 Flat head square screws DIN 603/M10 x 65 Clamping washer DIN 6796/10 Hexagonal nuts ISO 4032/M10 Cable anchoring bracket Cable bracket profile C30/W800 Cable, conductors, small parts, screws, nuts, washers with locking edges for cable connection

8PQ1 208-6BA01 8PQ1 204-6BA01 8PQ3 000-0BA01 8PQ3 000-0BA03 8PQ1 204-4BA05 8PQ1 018-0BA01 8PQ1 014-0BA01 8PQ1 010-6BA01 8PQ2 000-8BA03 8PQ2 197-4BA02 8PQ2 197-8BA11 8PQ2 308-5BA05 8PQ2 308-6BA06 8PQ2 304-6BA05 8PQ2 308-6BA03 8PQ2 308-6BA02 8PQ2 304-6BA02 8PQ2 420-8BA02 8PQ2 420-4BA02 8PQ2 520-6BA01
i201_06796
Busbar systems
8PQ4 000-0BA04 8PQ4 000-0BA37 8PQ4 000-0BA82 8PQ4 000-0BA63 8PQ4 000-0BA74 8PQ4 000-0BA18 8PQ4 000-0BA17 8PQ4 000-0BA80 8PQ6 000-3BA32 8PQ2 055-8BA05 8PQ2 055-8BA01 8PQ2 050-8BA01 8PQ6 000-0BA47 8PQ6 000-0BA65
i201_06798
Internal separation
8PQ3 000-0BA54 8PQ4 000-0BA03 8PQ4 000-0BA07 8PQ3 000-0BA82 8PQ5 000-0BA10 8PQ5 000-0BA21 8PQ5 000-0BA38 8PQ5 000-0BA38
Busbar systems
Accessories
i201_06797
Siemens LV 56 2011
3/3
Siemens AG 2012
SIVACON S4 cubicle type Economic with 3VL, vertical distribution busbar at the rear
Overview
Height Width Depth Height of base Degree of protection Main busbar system Distribution busbar system Front Internal separation mm mm 2000 1400 400 100 IP55 without non-cascaded 630 A, 15 kA covers, section door 1 Order No. Quan- Description tity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 8 1 1 3 2 11 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Cubicle H2000/W600/D400/ECO Cubicle H2000/W800/D400/ECO Board coupling kit Switchboard coupling gasket IP5 Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W800 Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W600 Base side cover H100 Fixed front frame H1800/W600 Covers for cable compartment IP3X(H2000/W200 Cubicle type Economic upgrade set for main busbars/vertical busbars/separation Supporting structure for cover IP55 glazed door/2-way interlock/H1975/W800 IP55 glazed door/2-way interlock/H1975/W600 Side panel with design strip H2000/400 Busbar holder 30 10.50 mm Bare copper busbars L2000/30 10 Bare copper busbars L2000/20 5 Cover for 4 instruments, 1 switch 72 72/H200/W600 Cover for modular device, 3-row, 73MW/H600/W600 Cover for 3VT1/3,4-pole/vertical/fixed/H250/W600 Kit for modular device, single-row/24MW/W600 Closed cover H600/W200 Modular mounting plate/closed/H200/W600 Cover for 3VL6/3-pole/horizontal/fixed/H350/W600 Assembly kit for 3VL6/3-pole/horizontal/fixed/H350/W600 Cover for 3VL4/3-pole/horizontal/fixed/H200/W600 Assembly kit for 3VL4/3-pole/horizontal/fixed/H200/W600 Closed cover W600/H150 SIVACON - SIEMENS cubicle ID plate Cable anchoring bracket Cable bracket profile C30/W600 Support for cable duct DIN-Al double profile bar 35 mm/L1600 mm Cable, conductors, small parts, screws, nuts, washers with locking edges for cable connection Starters
Assembly kits
Infeed 3VL 800 moulded case circuit breaker, cable entry from top, terminals for cables, extended terminal covers 3VL400, 3VT1 moulded case circuit breakers, extended terminal covers, modular devices

Busbar systems
i201_18335
8GF5 763 8PQ4 000-0BA86 8PQ4 000-0BA83 8PQ2 020-6BA02 8PQ2 060-6BA04 8PQ2 025-6BA15 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ2 020-6BA01 8PQ3 000-1BA56 8PQ2 035-6BA22 8PQ6 000-5BA03 8PQ2 020-6BA06 8PQ6 000-2BA84 8PQ2 015-6BA02
Accessories
8PQ9 400-0BA07 8PQ3 000-0BA73 8PQ3 000-0BA42 8PQ6 000-0BA17 8PQ9 600-0BA02
i201_06801
Busbar systems
i201_18336
3/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
SIVACON S4 with protection and switching devices and modular devices
Overview
Height Width Depth Height of base Degree of protection Main busbar system Distribution busbar system Front Internal separation mm mm 2000 2200 600 100 IP30 without cascaded 1600 A, 50 kA, 50 mm system covers, glazed door 4b Starters
Assembly kits
Infeed 3WL air circuit breakers, size I, fixed, central connection to main busbar, cable entry from bottom/top 3VL moulded case circuit breakers with rear attachments for cable connection at the rear Modular devices
Order No.
Quan- Description tity 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 16 9 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 6 6 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 3 7 1 1 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 5 Cubicle H2000/W600/D600 Cubicle H2000/W800/D600 Bottom plate partition crossbar D600 Interior side upright H1800/D600,800 Interior side upright H1800/D600 Exterior intermediate upright Board coupling kit Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W600 Base corner pieces with front cover H100/W800 Base side cover H100/D600 Fixed front frame H1800/W600 Cover for cable compartment IP3X/H2000/W200 IP55 glazed door/left/2-way interlock/H1975/W600 IP55 glazed door/left/2-way interlock/H1975/W800 Bottom plate IP55/W200/D600 Bottom plate IP55/W600/D600 Top plate IP4X/W600/D600 Top plate IP4X/W800/D600 Rear panel IP4X/H2000/W600 Rear panel IP4X/H2000/W800 Side panel with design strip/H2000/D600 Support for distribution busbar, cascaded/30 40 Support for earthing bar PE Busbar holder 20 5, 50 mm Bare copper busbars L2000/40 10 Bare copper busbars L2000/20 5 Kit for 3WL11/3,4-pole/3WL12/3-pole/H550/W600 Cover for 3WL11/4-pole/H550/W600 Kit for 3VL4/4-pole/horizontal/H250/W600 Cover for 3VL4/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/plug-in/H250/W600 Kit for 3VL2-3/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/H200/W600 Cover for 3VL1-3/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/plug-in/H200/W600 Kit for 3VL5/4-pole/horizontal/H350/W600 Cover for 3VL5/4-pole/horizontal/fixed/plug-in/H350/B600 Kit for modular device, single-row/24MW/W600 Cover for modular device, single-row/24MW/H200/W600 Modular mounting plate/closed/H600/W600 Cover H400/W600 Cover H600/W600 Cover H300/W600 Cover H250/W600 Distribution busbar connection 3WL1116/fixed/W600 Cable connection 3WL1116/fixed/W600 Distribution busbar connection 3VL3/4-pole/horizontal/fixed Distribution busbar connection 3VL4/4-pole/horizontal/fixed Distribution busbar connection 3VL5/4-pole/horizontal/fixed Separation form 2b, distribution busbar H1900/D600 Plug-in rail for crossbars and partitions H1800 Separation form 3 horizontal/W600 Separation form 3 vertical/rear/H350/W600 Separation form 3 vertical/side/H350 Separation form 3 vertical/rear/H200/W600 Separation form 3 vertical/side/..250A/H200 Separation form 3 3WL11/3,4-pole/pull-out/H550/W600 Separation form 4 3WL11/3,4-pole/cable/W600 Separation form 4 3WL11/3,4-pole/distrib.busbar/W600 Separation form 3 vertical/rear/H250/W600 Separation form 3 vertical/side/400..630 A/H250 Protective bellows

8PQ1 206-6BA01 8PQ1 208-6BA01 8PQ3 000-1BA40 8PQ3 000-0BA03 8PQ3 000-1BA36 8PQ3 000-1BA42 8PQ1 204-4BA05 8PQ1 016-0BA01 8PQ1 018-0BA01 8PQ1 010-6BA01 8PQ2 000-6BA04 8PQ2 000-2BA01 8PQ2 197-6BA10 8PQ2 197-8BA10 8PQ2 302-6BA04 8PQ2 306-6BA05 8PQ2 306-6BA02 8PQ2 308-6BA02 8PQ2 420-6BA02 8PQ2 420-8BA02 8PQ2 520-6BA01
i201_06802
Busbar systems
8PQ4 000-0BA63 8PQ4 000-0BA82 8GF5 762 8PQ4 000-0BA17 8PQ4 000-0BA83 8PQ6 000-3BA31 8PQ2 055-6BA07 8PQ6 000-2BA87 8PQ2 025-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA18 8PQ2 020-6BA04 8PQ6 000-3BA10 8PQ2 035-6BA04 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ2 020-6BA12 8PQ3 000-1BA65 8PQ2 040-6BA01 8PQ2 060-6BA01 8PQ2 030-6BA01 8PQ2 025-6BA01 8PQ6 000-0BA34 8PQ6 000-0BA52 8PQ6 000-1BA64 8PQ6 000-1BA66 8PQ6 000-1BA68
i201_06804
Busbar systems
Internal separation
8PQ4 000-0BA03 8PQ3 000-0BA83 8PQ5 000-2BA61 8PQ5 000-2BA57 8PQ5 000-2BA36 8PQ5 000-2BA54 8PQ5 000-2BA30 8PQ5 000-0BA07 8PQ5 000-0BA30 8PQ5 000-0BA14 8PQ5 000-2BA55 8PQ5 000-2BA33 8PQ9 400-0BA03
i201_06803
Siemens LV 56 2011
3/5
Siemens AG 2012
SIVACON S4 with protection and switching devices and modular devices
Order No.
Quan- Description tity 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 SIVACON - SIEMENS cubicle ID plate Busbar connection kit Flat head square screws DIN 603/M10 65 Clamping washer DIN 6796/10 Hexagonal nuts ISO 4032/M10 Cable anchoring bracket Cable bracket profile C30/W600 Screws, nuts, washers with locking edges for cable connection
Accessories
8PQ9 400-0BA06 8PQ9 400-0BA02 8PQ9 500-1BA25 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ3 000-0BA73 8PQ3 000-0BA42
3/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

4/2 General data
4
4
4/4 4/6 4/8 4/10
Cubicles and supporting structure with one section with subdivision into two sections with subdivision into three sections Supporting structure for the internal separation form Cubicles for simple applications Cubicle type Economic with one section Cubicle type Economic with subdivision into two sections Mechanical upgrade kit Corner cubicles Board coupling kits Base Enclosure Front frames Internal covers/outer covers Cubicle panelling Cubicle doors with two-way interlocking system Cubicle doors for semi-cylindrical profile Double cubicle doors Inner doors Bottom plates Top plates Rear panels Side panels
4/11 4/13 4/14 4/15 4/16 4/17
4/19 4/20 4/21 4/22 4/23 4/24 4/25 4/26 4/27 4/29 4/30
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

General data
Overview
4
5
1
9 10
6 1 Cubicle 2 Base corner pieces, with front covers 3 Glazed door in Giugiaro Design 4 Rear panel 5 Side panel with design strip 6 Base cover, side 7 Bottom plate 8 Top plate 9 Supporting structure for main busbars in standard position 10 Supporting structure for main busbars in standard position with riser compartment 600 mm + 200 mm
I201_18204
4/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

General data
Cross section of possible combinations of cubicles, supporting structure and enclosures seen from above.
6 1 3 2 4 5
I201_18201
1 External intermediate upright for internal cover 2 Internal cover W200 3 Front frame 4 Cubicle panelling IP3X or 5 Section door IP4X IP55 6 Cubicle
6 1 3 4 2 5
I201_18202
1 External intermediate upright for outer cover/door 2 Outer cover W200, 400 or section door W400, 600 3 Front frame 4 Cubicle panelling IP3X or 5 Section door IP4X IP55 6 Cubicle
4 1
1 External intermediate upright for outer cover/door 2 Outer cover W200, 400 or section door W400, 600 3 Modular door or section door 4 Cubicle
2
I201_18203
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/3
Siemens AG 2012

Cubicles and Supporting Structure
with one section
Description
The cubicle is a framework consisting of vertical and horizontal sections plus the fasteners necessary to assemble them. poses. The installation of interior components is facilitated by the presence of height, width and depth locators. The interior supporting structure is made up of a vertical section, crossbars and fasteners. In cubicles of various heights and widths it ensures segregation between the equipment compartment and the busbar compartment, partitioning the cubicles into equipment compartments and main, or distribution, busbar compartments.
This provides the bearing structure supporting all built-in and add-on components. Stable and rugged construction is achieved through the use of Sendzimir-galvanised sections and self-tapping screws. Equipotential and safe earthing of all constituent parts are also achieved. The cubicle uprights have holes for anchoring to the base or the floor and for fitting crossbars or eyebolts for board handling pur-
Selection and ordering data

The values quoted below are the external dimensions. A complete configuration is made up of the following elements: cubicle, bottom plate partition crossbar and interior side upright for equipment heights of 1800 mm or 1600 mm.
Configuration
To assemble two or more cubicles by width or depth, order the board coupling kit for each coupling point.
Order No.
PS/P. unit
Cubicle Height: 2000 mm Width in mm 350 Depth in mm 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 8PQ1 200-4BA15 8PQ1 200-6BA14 8PQ1 200-8BA01 8PQ1 204-4BA01 8PQ1 204-6BA01 8PQ1 204-8BA01 8PQ1 206-4BA01 8PQ1 206-6BA01 8PQ1 206-8BA01 8PQ1 208-4BA01 8PQ1 208-6BA01 8PQ1 208-8BA01 8PQ1 200-4BA16 8PQ1 200-6BA15 8PQ1 200-8BA02 8PQ1 201-4BA02 8PQ1 201-6BA02 8PQ1 201-8BA03 8PQ1 202-4BA02 8PQ1 202-6BA02 8PQ1 202-8BA02 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
400
600
800
850
1000
i201_06834
1200
Supporting structure with bottom plate partition crossbar for width 1000 to 1200 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 Note No bottom plate partition crossbar is required for a width from 350 to 800 mm. Quantity 1 1 2 8PQ3 000-1BA38 8PQ3 000-1BA40 8PQ3 000-1BA38 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_xx_06843
4/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

with one section
Configuration Order No. PS/P. unit
Interior side uprights, for cubicle without main busbar Equipment height: 1800 mm For width from 350 to 1200 mm For depth from 600 to 800 mm Note For a depth of 400 mm the function is realised by the cubicle framework.
8PQ3 000-0BA03
1 unit
i201_06844
Interior side uprights, for cubicle with main busbar Equipment height: 1600 mm For width from 350 to 1200 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ3 000-0BA65 8PQ3 000-0BA01 8PQ3 000-0BA02 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06845
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/5
Siemens AG 2012

with subdivision into two sections
Overview
The exterior supporting structure is made up of a vertical section and the relative fasteners.
The exterior supporting structure for internal covers constitutes a cubicle upright that makes it possible to fit a front frame and an internal cover in front of a cubicle part 200 mm in width.
The exterior supporting structure for outer covers/door constitutes two cubicle uprights that makes it possible to fit modular doors/a front frame and a modular door/cover. Cubicle parts in a grid size of 200 mm are possible.

The values quoted below are the external dimensions. A complete configuration is made up of the following elements: cubicle, bottom plate partition crossbar, interior side upright for an equipment height of 1800 mm or 1600 mm and an exterior intermediate upright for mounting an inner cover or outer cover/door. For separation forms >1 when using 200 mm, 400 mm, 600 mm cubicles, as cable compartment or equipment compartment request an additional interior side upright, see page 4/10.
Configuration
A combination of exterior intermediate upright for internal covers and modular doors is not possible. To assemble cubicles by width or depth, request the board coupling kit for each coupling point. For 1200 mm wide cubicles it is recommended to use the accessory 8PQ9 400-0BA35, bracket for cubicle reinforcement (see page 10/6).
Order No.
PS/P. unit
Cubicle Height: 2000 mm Width in mm 600 Depth in mm 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 8PQ1 206-4BA01 8PQ1 206-6BA01 8PQ1 206-8BA01 8PQ1 208-4BA01 8PQ1 208-6BA01 8PQ1 208-8BA01 8PQ1 201-4BA02 8PQ1 201-6BA02 8PQ1 201-8BA03 8PQ1 202-4BA02 8PQ1 202-6BA02 8PQ1 202-8BA02 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
800
1000
1200
i201_06834
Supporting structure with bottom plate partition crossbar for width 600 to 1200 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 Quantity 1 1 2 8PQ3 000-1BA38 8PQ3 000-1BA40 8PQ3 000-1BA38 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_xx_06843
4/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

with subdivision into two sections
Interior side uprights, for cubicle without main busbar Equipment height: 1800 mm For width from 400 to 1200 mm For depth from 600 to 800 mm Depth in mm 600 800 Note For a depth of 400 mm the function is realised by the exterior intermediate upright. 8PQ3 000-0BA03 8PQ3 000-1BA36 8PQ3 000-0BA03 8PQ3 000-1BA37 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06846
Interior side uprights, for cubicle with main busbar Equipment height: 1600 mm For width from 400 to 1200 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ3 000-0BA65 8PQ3 000-1BA31 8PQ3 000-0BA01 8PQ3 000-1BA32 8PQ3 000-0BA02 8PQ3 000-1BA34 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06847
Exterior intermediate uprights, for internal cover 200 mm Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 to 800 mm Width: 600 to 1200 mm Exterior intermediate uprights, for outer cover/cubicle door/modular door Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 to 800 mm Width: 400 to 1200 mm
8PQ3 000-1BA42
1 unit
8PQ3 000-1BA43
1 unit
i201_06848
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/7
Siemens AG 2012

with subdivision into three sections
Overview
The exterior supporting structure is made up of a vertical section and the relative fasteners.
The exterior supporting structure for internal covers constitutes a cubicle upright that makes it possible to fit a front frame and an internal cover in front of a cubicle part 200 mm in width.
The exterior supporting structure for outer covers/door constitutes two cubicle uprights that makes it possible to fit modular doors/a front frame and a modular door/cover. Cubicle parts in a grid size of 200 mm are possible.

The values quoted below are the external dimensions. A complete configuration is made up of the following elements: cubicle, bottom plate partition crossbar and interior side upright for equipment heights of 1800 mm or 1600 mm and exterior intermediate upright. The exterior intermediate upright consists of the following combination of: 2 exterior intermediate uprights for internal cover or 1 exterior intermediate upright for internal cover and 1 exterior intermediate upright for outer cover/door or 2 exterior intermediate uprights for outer cover/door
A combination of exterior intermediate upright for internal covers and modular doors is not possible. For separation forms >1 when using 200 mm, 400 mm, 600 mm cubicles, as cable compartment or equipment compartment request an additional interior side upright, see page 4/10. To assemble cubicles by width or depth, request the board coupling kit for each coupling point.
Cubicle Height: 2000 mm Width in mm 800 Depth in mm 400 600 800 400 600 800 400 600 800 8PQ1 208-4BA01 8PQ1 208-6BA01 8PQ1 208-8BA01 8PQ1 201-4BA02 8PQ1 201-6BA02 8PQ1 201-8BA03 8PQ1 202-4BA02 8PQ1 202-6BA02 8PQ1 202-8BA02 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
1000
1200
i201_06834
Supporting structure with bottom plate partition crossbar for width 800 to 1200 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 Quantity 2 2 4 8PQ3 000-1BA38 8PQ3 000-1BA40 8PQ3 000-1BA38 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06849
4/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

with subdivision into three sections
Interior side uprights, for cubicle without main busbar Equipment height: 1800 mm For width from 800 to 1200 mm For depth from 600 to 800 mm Depth in mm 600 800 Note For a depth of 400 mm the function is realised by the exterior intermediate upright. Quantity 1 2 1 2 8PQ3 000-0BA03 8PQ3 000-1BA36 8PQ3 000-0BA03 8PQ3 000-1BA37 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06850
Interior side uprights, for cubicle with main busbar Equipment height: 1600 mm For width from 800 to 1200 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 Quantity 1 2 1 2 1 2 8PQ3 000-0BA65 8PQ3 000-1BA31 8PQ3 000-0BA01 8PQ3 000-1BA32 8PQ3 000-0BA02 8PQ3 000-1BA34 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06851
Exterior intermediate uprights, for internal cover 200 mm Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 to 800 mm Width: 800 to 1200 mm Exterior intermediate uprights, for outer cover/cubicle door/modular door
8PQ3 000-1BA42
1 unit
8PQ3 000-1BA43
1 unit
i201_06852
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/9
Siemens AG 2012

Supporting structure for the internal separation form
Overview
The supporting structure is made up of a vertical section, crossbars and fasteners. the cubicle into equipment compartment, main or distribution busbar compartment as well as cable compartment.
In cubicles of different depths the supporting structure ensures the creation of equipment and cable compartments and divides

For separation forms 2, 3, 4 and when using 200 mm, 400 mm or 600 mm cubicles, in a cubicle partitioned on the left/right as a
Configuration
cable compartment or equipment compartment, order a supporting structure kit as an additional component.
Order No. PS/P. unit
Interior side uprights, for cubicle without main busbar Equipment height: 1800 mm Height: 2000 mm Depth in mm 4001) 600 800
1)
8PQ3 000-1BA42 8PQ3 000-1BA36 8PQ3 000-1BA37
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Needed only for exterior intermediate upright for internal covers
i201_06853
Interior side uprights, for cubicle with main busbar Height: 2000 mm Equipment height: 1600 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ3 000-1BA31 8PQ3 000-1BA32 8PQ3 000-1BA34 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06854
4/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Cubicles for Simple Applications
Cubicle type Economic with one section
Overview
The cubicle type Economic offers economic benefits for simple applications. The cubicle combines rear panel, top and bottom plate and section in a single structure-forming element. Assembly is far shorter as the result and there is a significant saving in material. The cubicle rear panel includes locators for installing the optional partitioning and plug-in rails for section-high equipment with assembly kits for moulded case circuit breakers and fuse switch disconnectors. The cubicle type Economic is fully compatible with the standard cubicle and can be coupled to it. In cubicles of different widths the interior supporting structure ensures the creation of equipment and cable compartments and divides the cubicle into equipment compartment, main or distribution busbar compartment as well as cable compartment.
4 5 7 3
6 1
9 5 1
8 6
10 2 3
I201_18364
1 5
Frame Top plate
1 2 3 5 6
Frame Base corner pieces, with front covers Lateral base covers Top plate Side panel with design part
7 Glazed door in Giugiaro design 8 Cover frame 10 Covers for assembly kits 15 Rear panel 17 Bottom plate
13 Main busbars 14 Vertical distribution busbar system non-cascaded 15 Rear panel 16 Mounting plate for switching devices
i201_18365
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/11
Siemens AG 2012

Cubicle type Economic with one section

The values quoted below are the external dimensions.
A complete configuration is made up of the following elements: cubicle and interior side upright for equipment heights of 1600 mm or 1800 mm. One mechanical upgrade kit per cubicle must be ordered for using the horizontal main busbar with mounting position at the top or the vertical cubicle distribution busbar. If the cubicle is set up with cable entry at the top, the openings must be closed with
Configuration
flange plates and cable entry bushes. A selection of various flange plates and cable entry bushes can be found in chapter 10 (Accessories). The number of flange plates is defined by the cubicle width (W400 = 2 flange plates, W600 = 4, W800 = 6). To assemble cubicles by width, request the board coupling kit for each coupling point.
Order No.
PS/P. unit
Cubicle type Economic Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 mm Height in mm 400 600 800 8PQ1 204-4BA11 8PQ1 206-4BA11 8PQ1 208-4BA04 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07274
Interior side uprights, for cubicle with main busbar Equipment height: 1600 mm For width from 400 to 800 mm Depth in mm 400 Note For sections with an equipment height of 1800 mm the function is realised by the cubicle framework. 8PQ3 000-0BA65 1 unit
i201_07300
4/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Cubicle type Economic with subdivision into two sections
Overview
The exterior supporting structure is made up of a vertical section and the relative fasteners. The exterior supporting structure for internal covers constitutes a cubicle upright that makes it possible to fit a front frame and an internal cover in front of a cubicle part 200 mm in width. The exterior supporting structure for outer covers/door constitutes two cubicle uprights that makes it possible to fit modular doors/a front frame and a modular door/cover. Note: Cubicle parts in a grid size of 200 mm are possible.

The values quoted below are the external dimensions. A complete configuration is made up of the following elements: cubicle, interior side upright for an equipment height of 1800 mm or 1600 mm and an exterior intermediate upright for mounting an inner cover or outer cover/door. For separation forms >1 when using 200 mm, 400 mm, 600 mm cubicles, as cable compartment or equipment compartment request an additional interior side upright, see page 4/10.
A combination of exterior intermediate upright for internal covers and modular doors is not possible. To assemble cubicles by width or depth, request the board coupling kit for each coupling point.
Cubicle type Economic Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 mm Width in mm 600 800 8PQ1 206-4BA11 8PQ1 208-4BA04 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07274
Interior side uprights, for cubicle with main busbar Equipment height: 1600 mm For width from 600 to 800 mm Depth in mm 400 Note For sections with an equipment height of 1800 mm the function is realised by the cubicle framework. 8PQ3 000-0BA65 8PQ3 000-1BA31 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07364
Exterior intermediate uprights, for internal cover 200 mm Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 mm Width: 600 to 800 mm Exterior intermediate uprights, for outer cover/cubicle door/modular door Height: 2000 mm Depth: 400 mm Width: 600 to 800 mm
8PQ3 000-1BA42
1 unit
8PQ3 000-1BA43
1 unit
i201_06848
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/13
Siemens AG 2012

Mechanical upgrade kits
Overview
The mechanical upgrade kit is made up of supports and the relative fasteners. It is used to secure the busbar holder for the horizontal main busbar system in top mounting position, the busbar
holder for the vertical distribution busbar system, and for fitting the components of interior side uprights for cubicles with subdivision into two sections.

One mechanical upgrade kit per cubicle must be ordered for equipping the cubicle type Economic with subdivision into two
Configuration
sections or for using a horizontal main busbar system with mounting position at the top or a vertical cubicle busbar system.
Mechanical upgrade kits
8PQ1 000-0BA03
1 unit
i201_07275
4/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Corner cubicles
Overview
The conversion kit for corner cubicles modifies a standard cubicle for use as a corner cubicle (inside corner 90). It comprises structural elements, a front cover in Blue Green Basic, a rear panel and the relative fasteners. The overall length of the unit's front increases by 100 mm in both room axes.
i201_07333
Corner cubicle with 90 inner corner made from a standard cubicle and the corner cubicle conversion kit

A complete configuration is made up of a standard cubicle with identical width and depth dimensions and the corner cubicle conversion kit. Two rear panels in the width of the standard cuConfiguration
bicle and a top and floor plate for corner cubicles must be requested separately.
Cubicle Height: 2000 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 Width in mm 400 600 800 8PQ1 204-4BA01 8PQ1 206-6BA01 8PQ1 208-8BA01 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06834
Corner cubicle conversion kits Height: 2000 mm
8PQ1 200-0BA03
1 unit
i201_07330
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/15
Siemens AG 2012

Board coupling kits
Overview
The kit for coupling two or more boards by width or depth consists of fastening plates and screws. The board coupling gasket kit with degree of protection IP55 consists of a self-adhesive gasket roll.

To assemble two or more cubicles by width or depth, request a board coupling kit for each coupling point.
Configuration
For IP55 degree of protection, order an IP55 board coupling gasket kit as an additional component.
Board coupling kits Versions Board coupling kit IP55 board coupling gasket kit 8PQ1 204-4BA05 8PQ1 204-4BA04 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07329
i201_07328
4/16
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Base
Overview
The base kit is made up of the following elements: corner pieces, front covers and the relative fasteners. Side base covers are available for fitting to the sides. The covers of the base and front are not suitable for board transport and handling. For special situations, such as moving the cubicles on rollers, an optional base reinforcement kit is available (that can be applied along the width or the depth of the cubicle). Base reinforcements are mounted internally behind the front and/or side base covers.

For each board, the base side cover kit must be ordered once for the H100 base and twice for the H200 base.
Configuration
The H100 base reinforcement must be ordered twice for the H200 base.
Base corner pieces, with front covers Height in mm 100 Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 8PQ1 010-0BA01 8PQ1 014-0BA01 8PQ1 016-0BA01 8PQ1 018-0BA01 8PQ1 010-0BA02 8PQ1 011-0BA01 8PQ1 012-0BA01 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06826
200
350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06835
Base covers, side Height: 100 mm Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ1 010-4BA01 8PQ1 010-6BA01 8PQ1 010-8BA01 2 units 2 units 2 units
i201_06827
Base corner pieces, with front covers for corner cubicle Height in mm 100 Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ1 010-0BA04 8PQ1 010-0BA05 8PQ1 018-8BA01 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06962
200
400 600 800
8PQ1 024-4BA01 8PQ1 026-6BA01 8PQ1 028-8BA01
i201_07310
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/17
Siemens AG 2012

Base
Base reinforcement Height: 100 mm Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 ---Depth in mm -------400 600 800 8PQ1 010-0BA06 8PQ1 014-0BA02 8PQ1 016-0BA02 8PQ1 018-0BA02 8PQ1 010-0BA07 8PQ1 011-1BA01 8PQ1 012-2BA01 8PQ1 014-0BA02 8PQ1 016-0BA02 8PQ1 018-0BA02 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units
i201_06828
NSW0_00971
NSW0_00972
Transport with base and lift truck
Transport with reinforced base and rollers
4/18
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Front frames
Overview
The covers of the various assembly kits are anchored to a front frame by means of quick locking screws (a hinge kit can be an option to obtain a rotary cover). A front frame in fixed or swivel versions is available. The rotary mechanism enables the frame to be rotated over a 180 angle. This gives full access to the interior components of the board.

The front frames are available for 600 mm and 800 mm wide cubicles. H 1600 mm front frame for assembly kits with built-in covers for main busbar systems and earthing bars.
For an exact selection, see also the notes in chapter 5 "Busbar systems".
Fixed front frames for cubicles with front main busbars Equipment height: 1600 mm Width in mm 600 800 8PQ2 000-6BA03 8PQ2 000-8BA03 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06837
Fixed front frames for cubicles without main busbars or with rear main busbars Equipment height: 1800 mm Width in mm 600 800 8PQ2 000-6BA04 8PQ2 000-8BA04 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06838
Fixed front frames for cubicles with front main busbars Equipment height: 1600 mm Width in mm 600 800 8PQ2 000-6BA02 8PQ2 000-8BA02 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06808
Swivel front frames for cubicles without main busbars or with rear main busbars Equipment height: 1800 mm Width in mm 600 800 8PQ2 000-6BA01 8PQ2 000-8BA01 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06807
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/19
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Internal covers/Outer covers
Overview
Internal cover Outer cover An outer cover can be used instead of a door for 200 mm and 400 mm wide compartments. The kit includes a cover, an identification strip, an anchoring support and the relative fasteners. This cover must be used in conjunction with the front frame or as an alternative to the door.
For 200 mm wide cubicle sections, an internal cover that can be mounted behind the door is available. The kit is made up of a cover, an anchoring support and fasteners. This cover must be used in conjunction with a front frame and can be placed behind the door.

Internal cover When a 200 mm section is produced in a cubicle, this section can be placed on the left or the right side and is closed with an inner cover. For use only in conjunction with an exterior intermediate upright for internal covers.
Configuration
Outer cover The covers can be mounted as desired on the front or the back of the cubicle. For use only in conjunction with the exterior intermediate upright for outer covers/door.
Internal covers Degree of protection IP30 Height: 1900 mm Width: 200 mm
8PQ2 000-2BA01
1 unit
i201_06836
Outer covers Height: 1975 mm Width in mm 200 400 Degree of protection IP40 IP55 IP40 IP55 8PQ2 197-2BA15 8PQ2 197-2BA14 8PQ2 197-4BA02 8PQ2 197-4BA01 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06829
4/20
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Cubicle panelling
Overview
For 350, 600, 800 and 850 mm wide cubicles with front frame, cubicle panelling is available as an alternative to doors. The cubicle panelling ensures the same depth as an adjacent door and covers the cubicle. Front frame, covers and cubicle panelling achieve a degree of protection of IP30/31.

Cubicle panelling Degree of protection IP30 Height: 1975 mm Width in mm 350 600 800 850 Note The cubicle panelling in 350 mm and 850 mm width can be used only in conjunction with DIN ALPHA assembly kits, see chapter 6. The cubicle panelling in 800 mm width can be used only in conjunction with front frames. 8PQ2 197-0BA11 8PQ2 197-6BA11 8PQ2 197-8BA11 8PQ2 197-0BA12 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06821
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/21
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Cubicle doors with two-way interlocking system
Overview
The cubicle door kit is made up of Giugiaro Design glazed doors or metal plate doors, an identification strip, hinges and a preassembled bar lock closing system with two-way interlocking mechanism. The two-way interlocking mechanism can be replaced with other actuators or with a rotary handle (standard doors are not suitable for semi-cylindrical profiles). Thanks to the innovative hinge and
interlocking system, the door hinges can be fitted either on the left or the right. The position of the hinges can be modified at a later stage without having to remove any devices. If it is deemed necessary to fit a closing system with rotary handle and semi-cylindrical profile with security key, a series of dedicated doors with right or left side hinges is available to take account of the cylinder depth.

Standard version doors use a 3 mm two-way interlocking system. The doors can be mounted either to the front or back of the cubicle.
Configuration
In cubicles with degree of protection IP40 the top plate, the doors and the rear wall must have the same degree of protection.
Cubicle doors with two-way interlocking system Height: 1975 mm Degree of protection IP40 Hinge position Left Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 Right 350 400 600 800 850 1000 IP55 Left 350 400 600 800 850 1000 Right 350 400 600 800 850 1000 Cubicle doors with two-way interlocking system and window Height: 1975 mm Degree of protection: IP55 Hinge position Left Width in mm 600 800 850 1000 600 800 850 1000 8PQ2 197-6BA10 8PQ2 197-8BA10 8PQ2 197-0BA01 8PQ2 197-1BA10 8PQ2 197-6BA14 8PQ2 197-8BA14 8PQ2 197-0BA21 8PQ2 197-1BA20 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 8PQ2 197-0BA03 8PQ2 197-4BA08 8PQ2 197-6BA06 8PQ2 197-8BA06 8PQ2 197-0BA04 8PQ2 197-1BA06 8PQ2 197-0BA16 8PQ2 197-4BA11 8PQ2 197-6BA13 8PQ2 197-8BA13 8PQ2 197-0BA17 8PQ2 197-1BA18 8PQ2 197-0BA06 8PQ2 197-4BA05 8PQ2 197-6BA03 8PQ2 197-8BA03 8PQ2 197-0BA07 8PQ2 197-1BA03 8PQ2 197-0BA18 8PQ2 197-4BA10 8PQ2 197-6BA12 8PQ2 197-8BA12 8PQ2 197-0BA20 8PQ2 197-1BA17 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06820
Right
i201_06819
4/22
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Cubicle doors for semi-cylindrical profile
Overview
The cubicle door kit for semi-cylindrical profiles according to DIN 18252/18254, 8 45 is made up of Giugiaro Design glazed doors or metal plate doors, an identification strip, hinges and a bar lock closing system with rotary handle mechanism for semicylindrical profile.

Semi-cylindrical profile see chapter 10 "Accessories". The doors can be mounted either to the front or back of the cubicle. The hinges for double doors are hooked onto the cubicle externally. The double doors of 1000 mm wide cubicles are split into a 600 mm left section and a 400 mm right section. Opening sequence is: right and then left.
Configuration
4
The double doors of 1200 mm wide cubicles are split 50/50. Opening sequence is: right and then left. In cubicles with degree of protection IP40 the top plate, the doors and the rear wall must have the same degree of protection.
Order No.
PS/P. unit
Cubicle doors for semi-cylindrical profile Height: 1975 mm Degree of protection IP40 Hinge position Left Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 350 400 600 800 850 1000 8PQ2 197-0BA34 8PQ2 197-4BA06 8PQ2 197-6BA04 8PQ2 197-8BA04 8PQ2 197-0BA35 8PQ2 197-1BA07 8PQ2 197-0BA40 8PQ2 197-4BA07 8PQ2 197-6BA05 8PQ2 197-8BA05 8PQ2 197-0BA41 8PQ2 197-1BA08 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Right
i201_06839
IP55
Left
350 400 600 800 850 1000 350 400 600 800 850 1000
8PQ2 197-0BA31 8PQ2 197-4BA03 8PQ2 197-6BA01 8PQ2 197-8BA01 8PQ2 197-0BA32 8PQ2 197-1BA04 8PQ2 197-0BA36 8PQ2 197-4BA04 8PQ2 197-6BA02 8PQ2 197-8BA02 8PQ2 197-0BA37 8PQ2 197-1BA05
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Right
i201_06840
Cubicle doors for semi-cylindrical profile with window Height: 1975 mm Closed IP55 Hinge position Left Width in mm 600 800 850 1000 600 800 850 1000 8PQ2 197-6BA07 8PQ2 197-8BA07 8PQ2 197-0BA33 8PQ2 197-1BA11 8PQ2 197-6BA08 8PQ2 197-8BA08 8PQ2 197-0BA38 8PQ2 197-1BA12 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Right
i201_06841
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/23
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Double cubicle doors

Double cubicle doors with two-way interlocking system Height: 1975 mm Degree of protection IP40 IP55 Width in mm 1000 1200 1000 1200 8PQ2 197-1BA14 8PQ2 197-2BA11 8PQ2 197-1BA13 8PQ2 197-2BA10 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06830
Double cubicle doors for semi-cylindrical profile Height: 1975 mm Degree of protection IP40 IP55 Width in mm 1000 1200 1000 1200 8PQ2 197-1BA16 8PQ2 197-2BA13 8PQ2 197-1BA15 8PQ2 197-2BA12 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06831
4/24
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Inner doors
Overview
The inner door kit includes a door and hinges. The inner door is mounted behind the main cubicle door and in front of the section-high mounting plates.

The inner door requires a depth of 30 mm and cannot be used in conjunction with a front frame.
Inner doors Height: 1900 mm Width in mm 600 800 1000 8PQ2 000-6BA05 8PQ2 000-8BA05 8PQ2 000-1BA01 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06832
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/25
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Bottom plates
Overview
Bottom plates are available with degree of protection IP55 without cable entry opening and with degree of protection IP40 with cable entry opening.

For 800 mm deep cubicles, order two 400 mm deep bottom plates.
Configuration
For 800 mm, 1000 mm, 1200 mm wide cubicles, bottom plate selection depends on the combination of variants corresponding to the cubicle subdivision.
Bottom plates without cable entry Closed Degree of protection IP55 Depth in mm 400 Width in mm 200 350 400 600 800 850 1000
i201_06816
8PQ2 302-4BA04 8PQ2 300-4BA16 8PQ2 304-4BA05 8PQ2 306-4BA05 8PQ2 308-4BA05 8PQ2 300-4BA17 8PQ2 301-4BA04 8PQ2 302-6BA04 8PQ2 300-6BA20 8PQ2 306-4BA05 8PQ2 306-6BA05 8PQ2 308-6BA05 8PQ2 300-6BA21
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
600
200 350 400 600 800 850
Bottom plates with cable entry Degree of protection IP40 Depth in mm 400 Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 600 350 400 600 800 850 Bottom plates for corner cubicle Degree of protection IP55 Depth in mm 400 600 800
i201_07251
8PQ2 300-4BA18 8PQ2 304-4BA06 8PQ2 306-4BA06 8PQ2 308-4BA06 8PQ2 300-4BA20 8PQ2 300-6BA22 8PQ2 306-4BA06 8PQ2 306-6BA06 8PQ2 308-6BA06 8PQ2 300-6BA23
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06817
8PQ2 304-4BA12 8PQ2 306-6BA12 8PQ2 308-8BA08
4/26
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Top plates
Overview
Top plates are available with degree of protection IP55 and IP40 without cable entry opening and with degree of protection IP40 with cable entry opening. The top plates are equipped with pressure relief flaps. By means of a further upgrade, degree of protection IPX1 can be achieved.

Configuration
4
With the IPX1 upgrade, cubicles with degree of protection IP30 and IP40 can achieve degree of protection IP31 and IP41 respectively. Column height is increased by 62 mm.
Top plates without cable entry Closed Degree of protection IP40 Depth in mm 400 Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 600 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 800 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 IP55 400 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 600
i201_07327
8PQ2 300-4BA06 8PQ2 304-4BA02 8PQ2 306-4BA02 8PQ2 308-4BA02 8PQ2 300-4BA07 8PQ2 301-4BA02 8PQ2 302-4BA02 8PQ2 300-6BA13 8PQ2 304-6BA02 8PQ2 306-6BA02 8PQ2 308-6BA02 8PQ2 300-6BA14 8PQ2 301-6BA02 8PQ2 302-6BA02 8PQ2 300-8BA03 8PQ2 304-8BA02 8PQ2 306-8BA02 8PQ2 308-8BA02 8PQ2 300-8BA04 8PQ2 301-8BA02 8PQ2 302-8BA02 8PQ2 300-4BA04 8PQ2 304-4BA01 8PQ2 306-4BA01 8PQ2 308-4BA01 8PQ2 300-4BA05 8PQ2 301-4BA01 8PQ2 302-4BA01 8PQ2 300-6BA11 8PQ2 304-6BA01 8PQ2 306-6BA01 8PQ2 308-6BA01 8PQ2 300-6BA12 8PQ2 301-6BA01 8PQ2 302-6BA01 8PQ2 300-8BA01 8PQ2 304-8BA01 8PQ2 306-8BA01 8PQ2 308-8BA01 8PQ2 300-8BA02 8PQ2 301-8BA01 8PQ2 302-8BA01
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06809
350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
800
350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
Top plates with cable entry Degree of protection IP40 Depth in mm 400 Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850
i201_06815
8PQ2 300-4BA14 8PQ2 304-4BA03 8PQ2 306-4BA03 8PQ2 308-4BA03 8PQ2 300-4BA15 8PQ2 300-6BA17 8PQ2 304-6BA03 8PQ2 306-6BA03 8PQ2 308-6BA03 8PQ2 300-6BA18 8PQ2 300-8BA07 8PQ2 304-8BA03 8PQ2 306-8BA03 8PQ2 308-8BA03 8PQ2 300-8BA08
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
600
350 400 600 800 850
800
350 400 600 800 850
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/27
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Top plates
4
i201_06810
Top plates with degree of protection upgrade IPX1 Depth in mm 400 Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 600 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 800 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 Top plates for corner cubicle Degree of protection IP40 Depth in mm 400 600 800 400 600 800 8PQ2 304-4BA10 8PQ2 306-6BA10 8PQ2 308-8BA06 8PQ2 304-4BA08 8PQ2 306-6BA08 8PQ2 308-8BA05 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 8PQ2 300-4BA11 8PQ2 304-4BA04 8PQ2 306-4BA04 8PQ2 308-4BA04 8PQ2 300-4BA12 8PQ2 301-4BA03 8PQ2 302-4BA03 8PQ2 300-6BA15 8PQ2 304-6BA04 8PQ2 306-6BA04 8PQ2 308-6BA04 8PQ2 300-6BA16 8PQ2 301-6BA03 8PQ2 302-6BA03 8PQ2 300-8BA05 8PQ2 304-8BA04 8PQ2 306-8BA04 8PQ2 308-8BA04 8PQ2 300-8BA06 8PQ2 301-8BA03 8PQ2 302-8BA03 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
IP55
i201_07331
i201_07332
Top plates for corner cubicle, degree of protection upgrade IPX1 Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ2 304-4BA11 8PQ2 306-6BA11 8PQ2 308-8BA07 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07355
4/28
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Rear panels
Overview
Rear panels are available with degrees of protection IP55 and IP40. Rear panels with degree of protection IP55 are RAL 7035 powder-coated, and those with degree of protection IP40 are Sendzimir-galvanised.

Rear panels Height: 2000 mm Degree of protection IP40 Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 8PQ2 420-0BA01 8PQ2 420-4BA02 8PQ2 420-6BA02 8PQ2 420-8BA02 8PQ2 420-0BA02 8PQ2 420-1BA02 8PQ2 420-2BA02 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06833
IP55
350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
i201_06822
Siemens LV 56 2011
4/29
Siemens AG 2012

Enclosure
Side panels
Overview
The side panels are powder-coated and are available with degree of protection IP55, with or without a design strip.

For each board, order one side panel kit.
Side panels with design strip Height: 2000 mm Degree of protection IP55 Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ2 520-4BA01 8PQ2 520-6BA01 8PQ2 520-8BA01 2 units 2 units 2 units
i201_06824
Side panels without design strip Height: 2000 mm Degree of protection IP55 Depth in mm 400 600 800 8PQ2 520-4BA02 8PQ2 520-6BA02 8PQ2 520-8BA02 2 units 2 units 2 units
i201_06823
4/30
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
5/2 5/3 5/9 5/12 5/15 General data
5
Main busbar systems Distribution busbar systems Compact busbar systems Busbar connection fasteners
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
General Data
Overview
5
4
1 Main busbar system with rectangular profile 2 Connecting lugs for main busbar system 3 PE bar 4 Main busbar holder 5 Reinforcement
I201_18207
5/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Main busbar systems
Overview
The main busbar system of SIVACON S4 offers an appropriate scaling of rated currents, matched to the rated currents of standard version transformers. The busbar holders have been designed for the use of rectangular copper profiles. By using 2, 4 or 8 sub-conductors per phase, it is possible to achieve high resistance to short-circuits and to mount distribution and connecting rails without having to drill holes. This arrangement also simplifies the handling of one or more cubicles.
Type
The main horizontal busbar system provides for a variety of network configurations such as TN-C, TN-S, IT and TT. The connection of the PE bar to the cubicle is type-tested and ensures a safe transfer of fault currents to the cubicle. For TN-C network systems, a type-tested connection (PEN jumper) between the PEN bar and the cubicle is available.
5
Position Front frame with Cubicle of main busbar system equipment height depth A Up to 1600 mm Rear top, middle, bottom 1800 mm 400
Supporting Rated structure with current equipment height mm
Main busbar system 1800 with vertical bar arrangement
i201_07334
Main busbar system 1600 in standard position with horizontal bar arrangement
Up to 3200
Top, front
1600
400
i201_06870
600
i201_06871
800
i201_06872
Top, rear
1600 1800 Note: The 150 mm high upper module must be used only to fit the covers.
800 800
i201_06873
Up to 4000
Top, front and rear (dou- 1600 ble main busbar system)
800
i201_06874
Main busbar system 1800 in variable position
Up to 3200
Variable, rear Note: To position the main busbar system at a height other than the top position, one crossbar kit for a cubicle depth of 400 mm is required for each cubicle in order to fasten the busbar holder.
1800
800
i201_06869
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/3
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Main busbar systems
Rated currents for main busbar systems with horizontal bar arrangement These values refer to normal operating conditions and indoor installation in accordance with IEC 61439-1, in particular with reference to an ambient temperature of 35C (24 h average).
Number of bars per phase Dimensions
For different operating conditions, take into account the correction factors according to chapter "Planning and Configuration".
Rated current In at 35 C ambient temperature Cubicle depth 400 mm Cubicle depth 600 mm IP IP41 1190 1630 1920 2490 3040 3320 -IP55 965 1310 1540 1950 2350 2570 -Cubicle depth 800 mm IP IP41 1190 1630 1930 2510 3100 3410 3700 4660 IP55 965 1310 1650 2110 2560 2820 3000 3680
mm 2 4 20 10 30 10 20 10 30 10 40 10 50 10 24 20 10 30 10
IP IP41 1190 1630 1920 2460 2980 3220 --
IP55 965 1310 1420 1790 2150 2330 --
Rated currents for main busbar system with vertical bar arrangement These values refer to normal operating conditions and indoor installation in accordance with IEC 61439-1, in particular with reference to an ambient temperature of 35C (24 h average).
Number of bars per phase 2 Dimensions mm 20 10 30 10 40 10 Rated current In at 35 C ambient temperature IP IP41 1000 1300 1600 IP55 900 1100 1400
For different operating conditions, take into account the correction factors according to chapter 12 "Planning and Configuration".
Dimensioning of the cross-section for PE bars according to the short-circuit current The cross-sections quoted for the PE bar are type-tested according to IEC 61439-1. According to IEC 61439-1, dimensioning of the PE bar cross-section equal to 25 % of the phase conductor cross-section is also permitted.
Number of bars per phase Dimensions Rated short-time current Icw (1 s current, rms value) mm 2 20 5 30 5 40 5 30 10 kA 65 85 100 100
5/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Main busbar systems
Determination of the number of reinforcements as a function of short-circuit currents for main busbar system with horizontal bar arrangement
Busbar size Number of bars per phase 2 Dimensions mm 20 10 mm 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 30 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 4 20 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 30 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 40 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 50 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 2 41) 20 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200 30 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 1200
1)
Section width
Number of reinforcements as a function of Ipk, Icw and cubicle width Icw = 25 kA Ipk = 52.5 kA 0 0 1 1 2 -Icw = 35 kA Ipk = 73.5 kA 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 1 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 -0 1 1 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 2 -0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3 3 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 Icw = 50 kA Ipk = 105 kA -Icw = 65 kA Icw = 85 kA Icw = 100 kA Ipk = 220 kA -Ipk = 143 kA Ipk = 187 kA ---
The number of reinforcements applies to a main busbar system. Since the 3700 A and 4000 A main busbar system is made up of two systems, the number of reinforcements to be ordered must be doubled.
Note: For the determination of the distances between busbar holders and reinforcements, refer to the SIVACON S4 Manual.
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
Single-cubicle transport unit 1 2 Main busbar holder Reinforcement
Multi-cubicle transport unit
I201_18205
Note: The number of reinforcements depends on the size of the short-circuit currents and the cubicle widths.
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/5
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Main busbar systems
Determination of the number of reinforcements as a function of short-circuit currents for main busbar system with vertical bar arrangement
Busbar size Number of bars per phase 2 Dimensions mm 20 10 mm 350/400 600 800/850 1000 30 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 40 10 350/400 600 800/850 1000 Section width Number of reinforcements as a function of Ipk, Icw and cubicle width Icw = 25 kA Ipk = 52.5 kA 0 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Icw = 35 kA Ipk = 73.5 kA 0 1 1 2 0 1 1 2 0 1 1 2 Icw = 55 kA Ipk = 121 kA 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3
Note: For the determination of the distances between busbar holders and reinforcements, refer to the SIVACON S4 Manual. The number of reinforcements depends on the size of the short-circuit currents and the cubicle widths.
5/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Main busbar systems

Configuration Busbar cross-section mm mm Main busbar holder kit with horizontal bar arrange20 10, 30 10, ment up to 3200 A, with PE bar connection to cubicle 40 10, 50 10 8PQ4 000-0BA04 Order No. PS/ P. unit 2 units
5
i201_06862
Main busbar holder kit with horizontal bar arrangement > 3200 A, with PE bar connection to cubicle
20 10, 30 10, 40 10, 50 10
8PQ4 000-0BA60
2 units
i201_06863
Main busbar reinforcement kit with horizontal bar arrangement
20 10, 30 10, 40 10, 50 10
8PQ4 000-0BA37
1 unit
i201_06864
Main busbar connecting lug kits with horizontal bar arrangement for L1, L2, L3, N or PEN
20 10 30 10 40 10 50 10
8PQ4 000-0BA53 8PQ4 000-0BA54 8PQ4 000-0BA56 8PQ4 000-0BA57
4 units 4 units 4 units 4 units
i201_06856
Main busbar holder kit with vertical bar arrangement 20 10 up to 1600 A, with PE bar connection to cubicle 30 10 40 10
8PQ4 000-1BA10
2 units
i201_07335
Main busbar reinforcement kit with vertical bar arrangement
20 10 30 10 40 10
8PQ4 000-1BA12
1 unit
i201_07336
Main busbar connecting lug kits with vertical bar arrangement for L1, L2, L3, N or PEN
20 10 30 10 40 10
8PQ4 000-1BA16 8PQ4 000-1BA15 8PQ4 000-1BA14
4 units 4 units 4 units
i201_07338
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/7
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Main busbar systems
Configuration Connecting lug kits for PE bar Busbar cross-section mm mm 20 5, 30 5, 30 10 8PQ4 000-0BA52 40 5, 40 10, 50 10 8PQ4 000-0BA67 Order No. PS/ P. unit 2 units 2 units
5
i201_06855
Connecting bar kit for double main busbar system Note Without screws, washers and nuts Order one per cubicle. Cannot be installed in 350 mm and 400 mm wide cubicles.
i201_06881
--
8PQ4 000-0BA62
1 unit
PEN jumper for main busbar system with horizontal bar arrangement Note Without screws, washers and nuts One PEN jumper is needed for each cubicle in order to connect the PEN bar to the cubicle.
--
8PQ4 000-0BA12
10 units
i201_06875
PEN jumper for main busbar system with vertical bar -arrangement Note Without screws, washers and nuts One PEN jumper is needed for each cubicle in order to connect the PEN bar to the cubicle.
8PQ4 000-1BA13
10 units
i201_07337
Accessories, PE bar connection to cubicle Note The PE bar connection to the cubicle is included in the holder kit for the main busbar.
--
8PQ4 000-0BA82
6 units
i201_06877
Upgrade kit for arcing fault protection Note The upgrade kit for arcing fault protection is needed for an arcing duration of between 100 ms and 300 ms. Order one kit for each side panel kit.
20 10, 30 10, 40 10, 50 10
8PQ9 400-0BA21
2 units
i201_06882
5/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Distribution busbar systems
Overview
i201_06883
i201_06884
i201_06885
Cascaded vertical distribution busbar system with profiled busbars, single arrangement
Cascaded vertical distribution busbar system with Non-cascaded vertical distribution busbar system rectangular bars, single arrangement with rectangular bars, single arrangement
i201_06886
i201_06887
i201_06888
Cascaded vertical distribution busbar system with profiled busbars, double arrangement side-by-side
Cascaded vertical distribution busbar system with Non-cascaded vertical distribution busbar system rectangular bars, double arrangement, aligned with rectangular bars, double arrangement, aligned
Rated currents for cascaded vertical distribution busbar system The rated short-time withstand current for a vertical cascaded distribution busbar system is determined on the basis of the number of bars per phase, cross-section, bar shape and the number of holders. These values refer to normal operating conditions and indoor installation in accordance with IEC 61439-1,
Number of bars per phase Dimensions mm 1 2 22 Profiled busbar 30 10 40 10 30 10 40 10 30 10 40 10 30 30 40 30
in particular at an ambient temperature of 35C (24h average). In different operating conditions, the correction factors given in the Planning and Configuration chapter have to be taken into account.
Rated current at 35 C ambient Number of holders per cubicle and system temperature Icw = 25 kA Icw = 35 kA Icw = 50 kA IP IP41 IP55 I = 52.5 kA I = 73.5 kA I = 105 kA
pk pk pk
Icw = 65 kA Ipk = 143 kA --5 5 3 3 5 5 3 3
Icw = 85 kA Ipk = 187 kA ----4 4 --4 4
922 1100 1530 1651 3060 3302 1289 1518 2578 3036
837 980 1337 1543 2674 3086 1066 1217 2132 2434
4 4 4 4 --2 2 ---
4 4 4 4 --3 3 ---
--4 4 2 2 4 4 2 2
2 profiled busbar 30 30 40 30
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/9
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Rated currents for non-cascaded vertical distribution busbar system The rated short-time withstand current of a non-cascaded vertical busbar system is determined on the basis of the number of bars per phase, cross-section and number of reinforcements. For each cubicle, order one holder and support kit. These values refer to normal operating conditions and indoor installation in accordance with IEC 60439-1, in particular with reference to an ambient temperature of 35 C (24 h average). In different operating conditions, the correction factors given in the Planning and Configuration chapter have to be taken into account.
Icw = 50 kA Ipk = 105 kA -2 2 2 0 0 Icw = 65 kA Ipk = 143 kA --2 2 2 2 Icw = 85 kA Ipk = 187 kA ---2 2 2 Icw = 100 kA Ipk = 220 kA ----4 4
Number of bars per phase 2 4
Dimensions Rated current at 35 C ambient temperature mm 20 10 30 10 20 10 30 10 40 10 50 10 IP IP41 1010 1390 1630 2091 2533 2737 IP55 820 1110 1207 1520 1825 1980
Number of holders per cubicle and system Icw = 25 kA Ipk = 52 kA 0 0 0 0 0 0 Icw = 35 kA Ipk = 73 kA 0 0 0 0 0 0

For profiled busbars, the connections are made by means of Thead screws. When using parallel rectangular busbars, the connections are made by means of screws and busbar clamps. Assembly kits
Configuration Compartment width mm Busbar holder kits for cascaded vertical distribution busbar system 200 Busbar dimensions mm mm 40 30 40 10 30 30 30 10 Profiled busbar Rectangular profile Profiled busbar Rectangular profile 8PQ4 000-0BA63 8PQ4 000-0BA63 8PQ4 000-0BA32 8PQ4 000-0BA32 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Busbar shape Order No. PS/P. unit
Note: Each kit contains four lugs for connection of L1, L2, L3 and N to the horizontal main busbar system.
i201_06868
Busbar holder kit for non- 200 cascaded vertical distribution busbar system 400
i201_06866
20 10, 30 10, 40 10, 50 10 20 10, 30 10, 40 10, 50 10 20 10, 30 10, 40 10, 50 10
Rectangular profile
8PQ4 000-0BA77
3 units
Rectangular profile
8PQ4 000-0BA31
3 units
Busbar reinforcement kit -for non-cascaded vertical distribution busbar system
Rectangular profile
8PQ4 000-0BA37
1 unit
i201_06864
Support kits for noncascaded vertical distribution busbar system
200 400
---
---
8PQ4 000-0BA78 8PQ4 000-0BA61
1 unit 1 unit
i201_06867
5/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Anchoring support, insulated for N/PEN/PE, vertical in cable compartment
8PQ4 000-0BA11
4 units
i201_06896
Connecting lug kits for vertical distribution busbar system to main busbar system with horizontal bar arrangement, top position Versions Busbar dimensions mm mm Cascaded 30 30, 30 10 Right Front Rear Left Front Rear 40 30, 40 10
i201_06879
Position Cubicle bus- Main busbar bar system system
Cubicle depth mm 400 8PQ4 000-0BA45 600, 800 8PQ4 000-0BA46 800 8PQ4 000-0BA50 400 8PQ4 000-0BA73 600, 800 8PQ4 000-0BA72 800 8PQ4 000-0BA70 400 8PQ4 000-0BA47 600, 800 8PQ4 000-0BA48 800 8PQ4 000-0BA51 400 8PQ4 000-0BA75 600, 800 8PQ4 000-0BA48 800 8PQ4 000-0BA71 400 8PQ4 000-0BA38 600, 800 8PQ4 000-0BA40 800 8PQ4 000-0BA43 400 8PQ4 000-0BA41 600, 800 8PQ4 000-0BA42 800 8PQ4 000-0BA44 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Right
Front Rear
Left
Front Rear
Non-cascaded
20 10, 30 10 40 10, 50 10
-------
Front Rear Front Rear
i201_06857
Note Each kit contains four lugs for connection of L1, L2, L3 and N to the horizontal main busbar system Without screws, clamping washers and nuts. Busbar clamp for M10 screw 8PQ9 400-0BA02 20 units
i201_06880
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/11
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Compact busbar systems
Overview
Compact busbar systems may be arranged as desired in the cubicle with uprights and crossbars.
5
5
4 3
8GF57 compact busbar system, non-cascaded, fastened with crossbars
8GF57 compact busbar system, cascaded, fastened with crossbars
1 Non-cascaded busbar holder 2 Cascaded busbar holder 3 Crossbars for installation in cubicle width 4 Crossbars for installation in cubicle depth 5 Supporting structure
I201_18206
Uninterrupted current for busbars, E-Cu bare, for an ambient temperature of 35 C according to DIN 4367
Number of bars Dimensions per phase mm 1 15 5 20 5 30 5 30 10 Uninterrupted current for a busbar temperature of 65 C A 222 274 379 573 85 C A 293 362 500 756 105 C A 349 430 595 900 Holder spacing Icw = 5 kA mm 600 600 600 600 Icw = 10 kA mm 400 600 600 600 Icw = 15 kA mm -400 450 400 Icw = 20 kA mm --352 300 Icw = 25 kA mm --300 250
5/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems

Compact busbar systems are used for the distribution of uninterrupted currents up to 630 A and rated short-time currents Icw up to 25 kA. Compact busbar systems, with pole centre distance of 50 mm, can be used in conjunction with the SIKclip rapid wiring assembly system for modular devices. Compact busbar system with 50 mm pole centre distance
For compact busbar systems, with pole centre distance of 60 mm, a wide range of adapters for SIRIUS and 3VL moulded case circuit breakers is available together with many other accessories.
Linear universal busbar holders 4-pole Rectangular profile Height: 200 mm Arrangement Non-cascaded
i201_06889
Busbar dimensions mm mm 15 5, 20 5, 30 5 30 10 8GF5 762 8GF5 763 8GF5 760 8GF5 761 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Cascaded
15 5, 20 5, 30 5 30 10
i201_06890
Compact busbar system with 60 mm pole centre distance, busbar system, accessories
Busbar holders Pole centre distance: 60 mm Busbar dimensions (mm mm): 15 5, 20 5, 30 5, 30 10 Width: 20 mm Arrangement: Non-cascaded Versions 3-pole 4-pole 8US1 923-3AA01 8US1 923-4AA00 10 units 10 units
i201_06891
Busbar holder end covers Pole centre distance: 60 mm Versions 3-pole 4-pole 8US1 922-1AC00 8US1 922-1AB00 10 units 1 unit
i201_06892
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/13
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Copper busbars
Configuration Thread Current A Rigid copper busbars, perforated with threading M6 -T K -Length Cross-section mm 2000 mm mm 15 5 25 5 30 5 8GF5 751 8GF5 737 8GF5 742 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Order No. PS/P. unit
5
i201_06860
Rigid copper busbars, perforated
For M10 --
--
2000 1750 2000
40 5 60 5 30 10 40 10
8PQ4 000-0BA81 8PQ4 000-1BA05 8GF5 752 8PQ4 000-0BA24
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06860
Rigid copper busbars
--
--
--
2000
20 5 30 5 40 5 15 10 20 10 30 10
8PQ4 000-0BA83 8PQ4 000-0BA85 8PQ4 000-0BA80 8PQ4 000-1BA04 8PQ4 000-0BA84 8PQ4 000-0BA86 8PQ4 000-0BA17 8PQ4 000-0BA18 8PQ4 000-0BA87 8PQ4 000-0BA88 8PQ4 000-1BA00
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 4 units 4 units
i201_06859
40 10 50 10 60 10 80 10 100 10 Flexible copper busbars, insulated -160 250 250 400 630 800 40 20 40 40 40 30 40 50 50 -1610 2000
13 3 0,5 8GF5 686 20 5 1 8GF5 681 16 4 0,8 8GF5 687 24 4 1 8GF5 688 40 5 1 8GF5 690 40 10 1 8PQ4 000-1BA03 40 10 1 8PQ4 000-1BA03 32 10 1 8PQ4 000-1BA02 40 10 1 8PQ4 000-1BA03 30 30 40 30 8PQ4 000-0BA27 8PQ4 000-0BA26
i201_06861
1000 1000 1250 Copper busbars, H-shaped ---
i201_06858
Cover profiles for busbars Rectangular profile Busbar dimensions mm mm 20 5, 30 5 20 10, 30 10 Length mm 1000 1000 8US1 922-2AA00 8US1 922-2BA00 10 units 10 units
i201_06893
5/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Busbar connection fasteners
Overview To ensure a reliable connection of the copper busbars, it is important to select quality fasteners, of the right size, suitable and appropriately treated for the task. The table below provides an overview of the various copper busbar / fastener combination options, so as to facilitate selection and ordering.

The stated quantity of fasteners applies to a 4-pole arrangement. Rules for calculation of the screw length for different busbar dimensions:
Configuration Profile
Length of screw with M8 threading = busbars profile + 15 mm Length of screw with M10, M12 threading = busbars profile + 20 mm
Order No. Description
Cross-section Quantity mm mm 4 8 12 12 4 8 8 12 12 4 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 8 8 16 16 8 8 8 2 1 1 1 4 8 8 12 12 4 8 8 12 12 4 8 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 8 8 8 16 16 16 2 1 1 1
Main busbar system with two bars per phase

Connection from main Cascaded vertibusbar to: cal distribution busbar Profiled busbar 30 30, 40 30 8PQ9 500-0BA14 8PQ9 500-0BA01 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA14 8PQ9 500-1BA36 8PQ9 400-0BA02 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA14 8PQ9 500-1BA25 8PQ9 400-0BA02 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA14 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA14 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA34 8PQ9 500-0BA14 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA01 8PQ9 400-0BA02 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-1BA36 8PQ9 400-0BA02 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-1BA25 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA34 8PQ9 500-0BA16 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA05 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 35 T-head screw M10 x 25 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 35 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 55 Busbar clamp Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 35 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 65 Busbar clamp Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 35 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 35 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 - M6 x 10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 35 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 T-head screw M10 x 25 Busbar clamp Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 55 Busbar clamp Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 65 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10 Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 - M6 x 10 Non-cascaded square screw DIN 603 - M10 x 45 Clamping washer DIN 6796 - 10 Hexagonal nut ISO 4032 - M10
Rectangular busbar
2 30 10
2 40 10
Non-cascaded vertical distribution busbars
Rectangular busbar
2 20 10, 2 40 10 4 40 10, 4 50 10
Connection between cubicle and main busbar system Connection between main busbar PEN jumper and cubicle
L1...3, N (PEN)
Rectangular busbar
2 20 10, 2 30 10 --
PEN (per cubicle) --
Main busbar system with four busbars per phase

Connection from main Cascaded vertibusbar to: cal distribution busbar Profiled busbar 30 30, 40 30
Rectangular busbar
2 30 10
2 40 10
Non-cascaded vertical distribution busbars
Rectangular busbar
2 20 10, 2 40 10 4 40 10, 4 50 10
Connection between cubicle and main busbar system
L1...3, N (PEN)
Rectangular busbar
4 20 10, 4 30 10 4 40 10, 4 50 10
Connection between main busbar PEN jumper and cubicle
PEN (per cubicle) --
--
Siemens LV 56 2011
5/15
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar Systems
Notes
5/16
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Assembly Kits for Protection and Switching Devices

6/2 6/3 General data
6
6
Assembly kits for 3WL air circuit breakers Prefabricated assembly kits for 3WL air circuit breakers Delivery units for 3WL air circuit breakers Assembly kits for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers for horizontal installation with front cover for vertical installation with front cover for horizontal installation with modular door for vertical installation with modular door Assembly kits for 3VT moulded case circuit breakers for horizontal installation for vertical installation Assembly kits for 3K switch disconnectors Assembly kits for 3NP switch disconnectors Assembly kits for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors Assembly kits for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses Assembly kits for modular devices Assembly kits for 8GK4 system 8GK4 assembly kits for modular devices 8GK4 assembly kits for terminal blocks 8GK4 assembly kits with mounting plates 8GK4 assembly kits for empty sections 8GK4 assembly kits for 3NP4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors 8GK4 assembly kits for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers 8GK4 assembly kits for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors 8GK4 assembly kits for bus-mounting fuse bases Assembly kits for modular devices SIKclip
6/6
6/7
6/8 6/11 6/15 6/18 6/21 6/22 6/23 6/24 6/26
6/30
6/32
6/35
6/38 6/41 6/43
6/44
6/45
6/46 6/47
6/48
6/49
6/50
6/51
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

General data
Overview
3 4
1 Front frame 2 Prefabricated assembly kit and delivery unit for connection to cascaded distribution busbar 3 Assembly kit for 3WL air circuit breaker 4 Prefabricated assembly kit and delivery unit for connection to cable connection system 5 Cover with door sealing frame for 3WL
6/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
I201_18391
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3WL air circuit breakers
Overview
6 2 7
3 4 5
9 1 25
21 19 22
10
11
23 12
24
18
13
17
NSE0_01887d
14 20 16 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Guide frame Main circuit connection, front, flange, horizontal, vertical Position signalling switch Ground connection, leading Shutters COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module External CubicleBUS module Closing coil, auxiliary release Auxiliary conductor plug-in system 14 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated 15 Motorized operating mechanism 16 Operating cycles counter 17 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 18 Protective device with device holder, Electronic Trip Unit (ETU) 19 Remote reset solenoid 20 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA Plus) 21 Four-line display 22 Ground-fault protection module 23 Rating plug 24 Measurement function module 25 Circuit breaker
10 Auxiliary switching block 11 Door sealing frame 12 Interlocking set for mechanical ON/OFF 13 Transparent panel, function insert
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/3
Siemens AG 2012

Size Type Switching capacity class I 3WL11 N II 3WL12 N
Short-circuit breaking capacity

Rated operating voltage Ue up to 415 V AC
Icu Ics Icm
kA 55 kA 55 kA 121 kA 55 kA 55 kA 121 kA 42 kA 42 kA 88 kA -kA -kA -kA kA kA kA 50 42 29,5 24
66 66 145 66 66 145 50 50 105 ---66 50 35 29 66 50 -3) 4)
66 66 145 66 66 145 50 50 105 ---66 55 39 32 66 50 --
80 80 176 80 80 176 75 75 165 ---80 66 46 37 80 75 --
100 100 220 100 100 220 85 85 187 50 50 105 100 80 651)/702) 501)/652) 100 85 504)

Icu Ics Icm

Icu Ics Icm
Rated operating voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC

Icu Ics Icm
Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)

0.5 s 1s 2s 3s Up to 500 V AC Up to 690 V AC Up to 1000 V /1150 V AC
1) 2)
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakers

kA 50 kA 42 kA --
Size II with In max. 2500 A. Size II with In max. 3200 A and In max. 4000 A.
At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be greater than the Icu value or Ics value at 690 V. Rated operating voltage Ue = 1150 V.
Size Type Minimum phase size Busbars, Cu bare or insulated, black
II
Up to 3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL11 10 Unit(s) 1 mm2 60 10 2 40 10 2 50 10 1 50 10 1 60 10 2 40 10 2 50 10 2 50 10 3 50 10 3 100 10
For further information, see the technical documents on 3WL air circuit breakers
I201_06903
I201_06904
3WL air circuit breaker with horizontal connections for fixed-mounted versions
3WL air circuit breaker with flange connections for draw-out versions
6/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012


General description The assembly kits for 3WL air circuit breakers are made up of crossbars, mounting plates, separation partitions and fasteners. The horizontal plate is suitable for the installation of circuit breakers, in fixed and draw-out versions of different sizes. Horizontal separation ensures the required arcing spaces. The IP4X cover and modular door kits are prepared for installing the 3WL9 111-0AP01-0AA0 door sealing frame which belongs to the 3WL. The IP55 modular door kit is prepared for installing the IP55 3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0 protective cover which belongs to the 3WL. The combination of door sealing frame and IP55 protective cover is not permitted. Neither the door sealing frame nor the protective cover are included in the scope of supply.
Configuration 3WL air circuit breakers in draw-out and fixed versions with cover Module height: 550 mm
Note The 3WL1240 circuit breaker can be installed only in 800 mm deep cubicles.
6
Order No. Order No. Order No.
I201_06901
I201_06902
Size
Compartment width mm 600 800
No. of poles
Minimum depth mm
Mounting plate
Cover
3 4 3/4 3 3 4
600 600 600 600 600 600
II
600 800
3WL air circuit breakers in draw-out and fixed versions with modular door module height: 550 mm
I201_07381
I2010_07302
I201_07303
Size
Compartment width mm 400 600 6001) 800
No. of poles
Minimum depth mm
Mounting plate
Modular door IP4X 8PQ2 055-4BA12 8PQ2 055-6BA16 8PQ2 055-6BA16 8PQ2 055-8BA08
Modular door IP55
I II
1)
3 3/4 3 3/4
400 400 400 600
-8PQ2 055-6BA17 8PQ2 055-6BA17 8PQ2 055-8BA10
The "mounting plate" kit can be used only for draw-out circuit breakers.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/5
Siemens AG 2012

Prefabricated assembly kits for 3WL air circuit breakers

General description The prefabricated assembly kits are made up of all the necessary crossbars, supports, reinforcements, fasteners and production-relevant drawings and information for the in-house production of copper busbars. If production and assembly comply with the information provided, the switchgear engineer is not required to repeat the type test verification in accordance with IEC 61439-1. An inspection-based type test verification in accordance with IEC 61439-1 exists for all the versions offered. With the cable entry variants and connection to the cascaded vertical distribution busbars variants, the system offers connection kits type tested in terms of CT mounting and number of connection points, in cascaded form, for the respective circuit breaker rated currents. Through the combination of variants it is possible to achieve functions such as incomer, outgoing and coupler.
Configuration Prefabricated assembly kits for connecting 3WL air circuit breakers to cascaded distribution busbar system Each 3/4-pole Size Modular cover at Compartment width Installation type the front mm
I201_07385
Note The prefabricated assembly kit for connecting 3WL air circuit breakers fills the quoted mounting height above or below the circuit breaker. To be able to anchor, bend and connect the cables it is necessary to leave enough space for the assembly operations. Attention Construction of connecting busbars for 3WL air circuit breakers with horizontal terminal bars for fixed versions. Construction of connecting busbars for 3WL air circuit breakers with flanged terminal bars for draw-out versions.
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Mounting height Above circuit breaker mm 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 300 300 300 Below circuit breaker mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 350 350 350 8PQ6 000-5BA48 8PQ6 000-5BA50 8PQ6 000-5BA51 8PQ6 000-5BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA45 8PQ6 000-5BA45 8PQ6 000-5BA46 8PQ6 000-5BA46 8PQ6 000-5BA53 8PQ6 000-5BA53 8PQ6 000-5BA47 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Modular door
4001) 600
Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed
Cover
600 800
I201_07384
II
Modular door Cover
800 800
Draw-out 300 350 8PQ6 000-5BA47 Prefabricated assembly kits for connecting 3WL air circuit breakers to cable connection system Each 3/4-pole Size Modular cover at Compartment width Installation type the front mm I
I201_07388
Mounting height Above circuit breaker mm 250 250 250 250 200 200 200 200 350 350 350 350 Below circuit breaker mm 300 300 300 300 250 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 8PQ6 000-5BA78 8PQ6 000-5BA80 8PQ6 000-5BA81 8PQ6 000-5BA82 8PQ6 000-5BA75 8PQ6 000-5BA75 8PQ6 000-5BA76 8PQ6 000-5BA76 8PQ6 000-5BA83 8PQ6 000-5BA83 8PQ6 000-5BA77 8PQ6 000-5BA77 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Modular door
4001) 600
Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
Cover
600 800
II
Modular door Cover
800 800
1)
3-pole kit corresponding to circuit breaker assembly kit
6/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Delivery units for 3WL air circuit breakers

General description The copper busbar delivery units for prefabricated assembly kits include all the copper busbars belonging to the respective prefabricated assembly kit. The busbars are mechanically prefabricated for immediate installation. Note Selection depends on the installation conditions of the related prefabricated assembly kit. The combination of prefabricated assembly kit and delivery unit produces a complete configuration for when in-house production of the copper busbars is not desired or not possible. The busbars delivered in the copper busbar delivery units for
Configuration Copper busbar delivery units for prefabricated assembly kit for connecting 3WL air circuit breakers to cascaded distribution busbar system Each 4-pole Size Modular cover at the front Modular door Current A I 1600 Compartment width mm 4001) 600 Cover 1600 600 800 II Modular door 2000 3200 Cover 2000 3200 800 800 800 800 Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
I201_07383
prefabricated assembly kits comply exactly with the information issued in the prefabricated assembly kits with regard to quality, dimensions, perforations and bends. The fasteners required for mounting are also included in the prefabricated assembly kits. The designs have inspection-based type test verifications in accordance with IEC 61439-1 as proof of their suitability to meet the specifications. Construction of connecting busbars for 3WL air circuit breakers with horizontal terminal bars for fixed versions. Construction of connecting busbars for 3WL air circuit breakers with flanged terminal bars for draw-out versions.
Order No. PS/ P. unit
Installation type
8PQ6 000-5BA36 8PQ6 000-5BA37 8PQ6 000-5BA38 8PQ6 000-5BA40 8PQ6 000-6BA08 8PQ6 000-6BA06 8PQ6 000-6BA10 8PQ6 000-6BA07 8PQ6 000-5BA41 8PQ6 000-5BA42 8PQ6 000-5BA43 8PQ6 000-5BA44 8PQ6 000-6BA12 8PQ6 000-6BA11 8PQ6 000-6BA14 8PQ6 000-6BA13
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
I201_07382
Copper busbar delivery units for prefabricated assembly kit for connecting 3WL air circuit breakers to cable connection system Each 4-pole Size Modular cover at the front Modular door Current A I 1600 Compartment width mm 4001) 600 Cover 1600 600 800
I201_07387
Installation type
Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
II
Modular door
2000 3200
800 800 800 800
Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
Cover
2000 3200
I201_07386
1)
3-pole corresponding to circuit breaker assembly kit
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/7
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly Kits for 3VL Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
General data
Overview
2 5
3 6
7 4
I201_18367
1 Outer front cover for head compartment 2 Modular door with cut-out for direct operating mechanism 3 Cover for 3VL moulded case circuit breaker, single branch unit 4 Cover for 3VL moulded case circuit breaker, multiple branch unit 5 Assembly kit for 3VL moulded case circuit breaker, horizontal 6 Copper connecting kit for connection to cascaded distribution busbar system 7 Assembly kit for 3VL moulded case circuit breaker, vertical
6/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

General data
10
8 10 11 6 5 4 3 7 2
12 1
13
16 15
6
17 23
19
14 20 18
NSE0_02087e
22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Einschub-/Stecksockel Einschubseitenwnde Phasentrennwnde
Gerade Anschlussschienen
Rundleiteranschlussklemme fr Al/Cu Rahmenklemme fr Cu
5 9
Verlngerte Anschlussabdeckung Standardanschlussabdeckung
10 Blend-/Abdeckrahmen fr Trausschnitt 11 Motorantrieb mit Federspeicher (SEO) 12 Motorantrieb (MO) 13 Frontdrehantrieb
8 21
14 Trkupplungsdrehantrieb 16 Internes Zubehr
15 Kompaktleistungsschalter 3VL
17 Elektronischer berstromauslser LCD ETU
18 Elektronischer berstromauslser mit Kommunikationsfunktion 19 Thermisch/magnetischer berstromauslser 20 RCD-Baustein 21 Rckseitige Anschlsse flach und rund
22 COM20/21 Kommunikationsmodul zum PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS
22 Batteriestromversorgung mit Testfunktion fr elektronische Auslser
NSE0_02087d
Anschlussschienen fr vergrerten Polabstand
$Draw-out/ plug-in base %Side panels of draw-out version &Phase separators (Terminal bars, divergent )Terminal bars, straight *Circular conductor terminals for Al/Cu +Box terminal for Cu ,Terminal cover, extended -Terminal cover, standard .Front frame/cover frame for door cut-out /Motorised operating mechanism with spring accumulator (SEO) 0Motorised operating mechanism MO 1Front-operated rotary operating mechanism 2Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism 3 3VL moulded case circuit breaker 4Internal accessories 5Electronic overcurrent release (LCD ETU) 6Electronic overcurrent release with communication function 7Thermal/magnetic overcurrent release 8RCD module 9Rear connections flat and round :COM20/21 communication module to the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS ;Battery power supply with test function for electronic trip units
7 22 6
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/9
Siemens AG 2012

General data
Type Conductor cross-sections Box terminals1) Single- or multi-wire cable Flexible wire with sleeve connector Flexible busbar Connecting terminal plate for flexible busbar2) Circular conductor terminal for cable1) only copper mm2 mm2 mm mm 2,5 ... 95 2,5 ... 50 12 10 2,5 ... 95 25 ... 185 2,5 ... 50 25 ... 120 12 10 17 10 50 ... 300 50 ... 240 25 10 2 units 6 32 copper or Al mm2 copper or Al mm2 mm2 copper or Al mm2 copper or Al mm2 mm2 copper or Al mm 16 ... 70 16 ... 150 10 ... 50 - 17 7 M6 16 ... 70 16 ... 150 10 ... 50 - 22 7 M6 25 ... 185 25 ... 120 - 24 7 M8 50 ... 300 -50 ... 240 - - 4 units 50 ... 240 -4 units 50 ... 185 M8 - - VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
Single- or multi-wire cable - With terminal cover Flexible wire with sleeve connector Multiple feed-in terminal1) Single- or multi-wire cable - With terminal cover Flexible wire with sleeve connector Direct busbar connection Screw type for screwed connection
1) 2)
120 ... 240 --
2 units 2 units 3 units 50 ... 120 50 ... 240 50 ... 240 2 units -70 ... 300 2 units 50 ... 95 32 10 M8 --
2 units 3 units 50 ... 185 50 ... 185 40 10 M6 M8
2 40 10 2 50 10 3 60 10
Cross-sections according to IEC 60999. Not for 690 V AC/600 V DC.
6/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

for horizontal installation with front cover

General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. For installation on the front frame, a choice of covers includes versions suitable for direct, motorised and rotary front operating mechanisms. The covers are secured to the front frame by means of fast closing screws. Hinges for fitting to the individual covers are available as an option. The N-Link kit includes a support, cover and fasteners. In the 4-pole mounting plate and 3-pole moulded case circuit breaker combination this kit provides the internal separation for a branch unit.
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version, for horizontal installation
Note For horizontal installation and front connections, extended terminal covers have to be ordered. A combination of front frame and covers with modular doors in a cubicle is not possible. Cover is prepared for a motorised operating mechanism with spring accumulator. In combinations of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism, the dimensions in chapter 11 "Mechanical Dimensions" must be taken into account.
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06911
I201_06906
I201_06907
Circuit breaker
No. of Connection poles
Operating mechanism
Height
Circuit breakers per kit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
mm 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 31) 4 Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 300 350 350 350 400 -8PQ6 000-4BA88 8PQ2 015-6BA21 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA01 8PQ2 020-6BA26 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA41 8PQ2 020-8BA10 -8PQ6 000-5BA00 8PQ2 015-6BA21 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA02 8PQ2 020-6BA26 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA42 8PQ2 020-8BA10 -8PQ6 000-2BA84 8PQ2 020-6BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-2BA87 8PQ2 025-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA06 -8PQ6000-3BA54 -8PQ6 000-3BA01 8PQ2 030-6BA03 8PQ6 000-4BA45 8PQ2 035-8BA10 8PQ6 000-5BA03 8PQ2 035-6BA22 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA10 8PQ2 035-6BA04
VL160X
VL160/250
600 800
VL400
600 800
VL630
600 800
VL800
600
8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-5BA04 8PQ2 040-6BA24
I201_06911
I201_06952
I201_06907
VL800 VL1250 VL1600

1)
800 800 800
3/4 3/4 3/4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised Direct, rotary and motorised
400 450 450
1 1 1
8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-4BA46 8PQ2 040-8BA21 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-4BA47 8PQ2 045-8BA05 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-4BA48 8PQ2 045-8BA05
The assembly kit also supports the 4-pole circuit breaker with front connection.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/11
Siemens AG 2012


General description The copper busbar connection kit for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers for horizontal installation is made up of all the necessary supports, reinforcements, copper busbars and covers. With the cable entry variants and connection to the cascaded vertical distribution busbars variants, the system offers connection kits type tested in terms of CT mounting and number of connection points to the busbars, in cascaded form, for the respective circuit breaker rated currents. Note The height of the connecting busbars kit matches the type of circuit breaker. The connecting busbar kit is suitable for branch units without RCD module. In addition to the copper busbars and the cover, the connecting busbar kit for 3VL circuit breakers for connection to the cables contains lateral partitions with connecting terminals. When fitting the connecting busbar kit for 3VL circuit breakers for connection to the cascaded vertical busbars in a 600 mm cubicle, the vertical distribution busbar system must be housed in the same cubicle (800 mm wide cubicle with riser compartment 600 + 200 mm).
6
Configuration Circuit breaker VL250 Compartment width mm 600 800 VL400 600 800 VL630 600 800
I201_06953
Copper connecting kits for 3VL circuit breakers for connection to cascaded distribution busbar system No. of poles 3 4
I201_06898
Installation Cover with cut-out for technique type of op. mech. Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct
Busbar size 5 25 5 25 5 25 10 30 10 30 10 30 10 40 10 40 10 40
Circuit breakers per kit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8PQ6 000-1BA63 8PQ6 000-1BA64 8PQ6 000-4BA51 8PQ6 000-1BA65 8PQ6 000-1BA66 8PQ6 000-4BA53 8PQ6 000-1BA67 8PQ6 000-1BA68 8PQ6 000-4BA55 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4
Copper connecting kits for 3VL circuit breakers for connection to the cables VL250 VL400 VL630
I201_06899
600/800 600/800 600/800
3 4 3 4 3 4
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct
5 25 5 25 10 30 10 30 10 40 10 40
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
6/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012


Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers with RCD, fixed version, for horizontal installation
Note For horizontal installation and front connections, extended terminal covers have to be ordered. A combination of front frame and covers with modular doors in a cubicle is not possible. Cover is prepared for a motorised operating mechanism with spring accumulator. In combinations of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism, the dimensions in chapter 11 "Mechanical Dimensions" must be taken into account.
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06911
I201_06906
I201_06910
Circuit breaker
CompartNo. of ment width poles mm
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height
mm 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3/4 Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised 150 200 200 150 200 200 250
No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
600 800
--
8PQ6 000-4BA88 8PQ2 015-6BA22
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA01 8PQ2 020-6BA27 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA41 8PQ2 020-8BA11 -8PQ6 000-5BA00 8PQ2 015-6BA21 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA02 8PQ2 020-6BA26 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA42 8PQ2 020-8BA10 -8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA06
VL160/250
600 800
VL400
800
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, plug-in version, for horizontal installation
I201_06911
I201_06906
I201_06907
Circuit breaker
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height
mm 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 300 350 350
No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
600 800
--
8PQ6 000-3BA24 8PQ2 015-6BA21
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-3BA27 8PQ2 020-6BA26 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA10 -8PQ6 000-3BA24 8PQ2 015-6BA21 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-3BA27 8PQ2 020-6BA26 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA10 -8PQ6 000-2BA84 8PQ2 020-6BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-2BA87 8PQ2 025-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA06 -8PQ6 000-3BA01 8PQ20 30-6BA03 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA10 8PQ2 030-6BA04 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-4BA45 8PQ2 035-8BA10
VL160/250
600 800
VL400
600 800
VL630
600 800
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/13
Siemens AG 2012


Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers with RCD, plug-in version, for horizontal installation
Note For horizontal installation and front connections, extended terminal covers have to be ordered. To improve the stability of the kits for VL400 and VL630 in plugin version it is necessary to fit a reinforcement kit for each branch unit. A combination of front frame and covers with modular doors in a cubicle is not possible. In combinations of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism, the dimensions in chapter 11 "Mechanical Dimensions" must be taken into account.
I201_06911
I201_06906
I201_06910
Circuit breaker
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height mm
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
600 800
3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3/4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct Direct Direct Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary
150 200 200 150 200 200 250
--
8PQ6 000-2BA75 8PQ2 015-6BA06
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-2BA81 8PQ2 020-6BA07 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA11 -8PQ6 000-2BA75 8PQ2 015-6BA04 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-2BA81 8PQ2 020-6BA05 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA10 -8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA06
VL160/250
600 800
VL400
800
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, for horizontal installation
I201_06906
I201_06937
Circuit breaker
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height mm
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160/250 VL400 VL630
600 800 600 800 600 800
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3 4 3/4
Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary
250 250 300 300 300 350 350
I201_06954
I201_06937
VL800 VL1250 VL1600
800 800 800
3/4 3/4 3/4
Direct Direct Direct
500 500 500
1 1 1
Reinforcement for 3VL moulded case circuit breaker kits, draw-out version, for horizontal installation
I201_06936
Circuit breaker VL400 VL630 VL630
No. of poles 3/4 3 4
Reinforcement 8PQ6 000-4BA17 8PQ6 000-4BA20 8PQ6 000-4BA18
6/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

for vertical installation with front cover

Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version, for vertical installation
Note Cover is prepared for a motorised operating mechanism with spring accumulator. In combinations of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism, the dimensions in chapter 11 "Mechanical Dimensions" must be taken into account. For vertical assembly kits which are equipped with a motorised operating mechanism, the adjacent mounting space must be left empty so that the mechanism can be tensioned by hand.
6
I201_06917
I201_06912
I201_06913
Circuit breaker
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 1 ... 3 1 ... 2
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
600 800
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised
----------------
8PQ6 000-2BA76 8PQ2 035-6BA02 8PQ6 000-2BA82 8PQ2 035-6BA03 8PQ6 000-2BA77 8PQ2 035-8BA02 8PQ6 000-2BA83 8PQ2 035-8BA03 8PQ6 000-3BA16 8PQ2 035-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA22 8PQ2 035-6BA03 8PQ6 000-3BA17 8PQ2 035-8BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA23 8PQ2 035-8BA03 8PQ6 000-2BA85 8PQ2 040-6BA07 8PQ6 000-2BA88 8PQ2 040-6BA05 8PQ6 000-2BA86 8PQ2 040-8BA08 8PQ6 000-3BA00 8PQ2 040-8BA07 8PQ6 000-3BA02 8PQ2 040-6BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA03 8PQ2 040-8BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA06 8PQ2 040-8BA05
VL160/250
600 800
VL400
b b b b
600 800 600 800
VL630
b b b b
8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA05 8PQ2 040-6BA08
I201_06938
I201_06913
VL800 VL1250 VL1600
b b b
600 600 600
3/4 3/4 3/4
Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised
600 600 700
1 1 1
b For front terminal bars, two additional covers, height 100 mm each, are required. Moreover, extended terminal covers have to be ordered for the respective circuit breaker.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/15
Siemens AG 2012


Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers with RCD, fixed version, for vertical installation
Note Cover is prepared for a motorised operating mechanism with spring accumulator. In combinations of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism, the dimensions in chapter 11 "Mechanical Dimensions" must be taken into account. For vertical assembly kits which are equipped with a motorised operating mechanism, the adjacent mounting space must be left empty so that the mechanism can be tensioned by hand.
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06917
I201_06912
I201_07389
Circuit breaker
CompartNo. of Connection ment width poles mm
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
600 800
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised Direct, rotary, motorised
-----
VL160/250
600 800
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, plug-in version, for vertical installation
I201_06917
I201_06912
I201_06913
Circuit breaker
CompartNo. of Connection ment width poles mm
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 1 ... 3 1 ... 2
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
a a a a
600 800 600 800 600 800 600 800
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary
----------------
8PQ6 000-3BA25 8PQ2 035-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA28 8PQ2 035-6BA03 8PQ6 000-3BA26 8PQ2 035-8BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA30 8PQ2 035-8BA03 8PQ6 000-3BA25 8PQ2 035-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA28 8PQ2 035-6BA03 8PQ6 000-3BA26 8PQ2 035-8BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA30 8PQ2 035-8BA03 8PQ6 000-2BA85 8PQ2 040-6BA07 8PQ6 000-2BA88 8PQ2 040-6BA05 8PQ6 000-2BA86 8PQ2 040-8BA08 8PQ6 000-3BA00 8PQ2 040-8BA07 8PQ6 000-3BA02 8PQ2 040-6BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA03 8PQ2 040-8BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA06 8PQ2 040-8BA05
VL160/250
a a a a
VL400
b b b b
VL630
b b b b
8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA05 8PQ2 040-6BA08
a For front terminal bars, two additional covers, height 50 mm each, are required. Moreover, extended terminal covers have to be ordered for the respective circuit breaker. b For front terminal bars, two additional covers, height 100 mm each, are required. Moreover, extended terminal covers have to be ordered for the respective circuit breaker.
6/16
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012


General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. For installation on the front frame, a choice of covers includes versions suitable for direct, motorised and rotary front operating mechanisms. The covers are secured to the front frame by means of fast closing screws. Hinges for fitting to the individual covers are available as an option.
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers with RCD, plug-in version, for vertical installation
The N-Link kit includes a support, cover and fasteners. In the 4-pole mounting plate and 3-pole moulded case circuit breaker combination this kit provides the internal separation for a branch unit. Note In combinations of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism, the dimensions in chapter 11 "Mechanical Dimensions" must be taken into account.
6
I201_06917 I201_06912 I201_07389
Circuit breaker
Compart- No. of Connection ment width poles mm
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4 1 ... 4 1 ... 3 1 ... 5 1 ... 4
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160X
600 800
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary
-----
VL160/250
600 800
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, for vertical installation
I201_06912
I201_06914
Circuit breaker
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 1 ... 2 1 1 1
Mounting plate
Cover
VL160/250 VL400
a a b b b
800 600 800 600 800
3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3/4
Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary Direct, rotary
VL630
b b
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, for vertical installation Minimum cubicle depth: 600 mm
I201_06915
I201_06916
Circuit breaker
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 600 600 650 650 1 1 1 1
Mounting plate
Cover
VL800 VL1250/1600
b b b b
600 600
3 4 3 4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct Direct Direct Direct
a For front terminal bars, two additional covers, height 50 mm each, are required. Moreover, extended terminal covers have to be ordered for the respective circuit breaker. b For front terminal bars, two additional covers, height 100 mm each, are required. Moreover, extended terminal covers have to be ordered for the respective circuit breaker.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/17
Siemens AG 2012

for horizontal installation with modular door

General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. The modular door kit with degree of protection IP4X is made up of a door, hinges, individual covers and fasteners. The N-Link kit includes a support, cover and fasteners. In the 4-pole mounting plate and 3-pole moulded case circuit breaker combination this kit provides the internal separation for a branch unit. Note For horizontal installation and front connections, extended terminal covers have to be ordered. A combination of front frame and covers with modular doors in a cubicle is not possible. For degree of protection IP55 an upgrade to IP55 is available (see page 7/8 "Modular Doors").
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version with direct operating mechanism, for horizontal installation
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06911
I201_07283
I201_07323
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm
No. of Connection poles
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakers mm 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 300 350 350 350 400 400 450 450 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link
Mounting plate
Modular door
VL160X
600 800
3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct
--
8PQ6 000-6BA27 8PQ2 015-6BA23
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA34 8PQ2 020-6BA30 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA41 8PQ2 020-8BA15 -8PQ6 000-6BA30 8PQ2 015-6BA23 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA36 8PQ2 020-6BA30 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA42 8PQ2 020-8BA15 -8PQ6 000-6BA44 8PQ2 020-6BA33 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-6BA45 8PQ2 025-6BA20 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-6BA46 8PQ2 025-8BA11 -8PQ6 000-6BA47 8PQ2 030-6BA24 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-6BA48 8PQ2 035-6BA23 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-6BA50 8PQ2 035-8BA14 -8PQ6 000-5BA03 8PQ20 35-6BA24 8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-5BA04 8PQ2 040-6BA25 8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-4BA46 8PQ2 040-8BA22 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-4BA47 8PQ2 045-8BA07 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-4BA48 8PQ2 045-8BA07
VL160/250
600 800
VL400
600 800
VL630
600 800
VL800
600 800
VL1250 VL1600
800 800
6/18
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, for horizontal installation Modular door with holes for 8UC door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Order No. Order No. Order No.
I201_06911
I201_06906
I201_06908
Circuit breaker
Compart- No. of ment poles width mm 600 800 3 4 3/4 3 4 800 3/4 3 4 800 3/4 3 4 800 3/4 31) 4
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit breakmm ers 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 300 350 350 350 400 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link
Mounting plate
Modular door
VL160X
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2
--
8PQ6 000-4BA88 8PQ2 015-6BA14
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA01 8PQ2 020-6BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA41 8PQ2 020-8BA12 -8PQ6 000-5BA00 8PQ2 015-6BA14 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-5BA02 8PQ2 020-6BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA42 8PQ2 020-8BA12 -8PQ6 000-2BA84 8PQ2 020-6BA20 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-2BA87 8PQ2 025-6BA10 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA08 -8PQ6 000-3BA01 8PQ2 030-6BA15 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA10 8PQ2 035-6BA15 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-4BA45 8PQ2 035-8BA12 -8PQ6 000-5BA03 8PQ2 030-6BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-5BA04 8PQ2 035-6BA16
VL160/250
600
VL400
600
VL630
600
VL800
600
I201_06911
I201_06952
I201_06908
VL800 VL1250 VL1600

1)
800 800 800
3/4 3/4 3/4
8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 3 8UC door coupling, size 3
400 450 450
1 1 1
The assembly kit also supports the 4-pole circuit breaker with front connection
3VL moulded case circuit breakers with RCD, fixed version, for horizontal installation
I201_06911
I201_06909
I201_06908
Circuit breaker
Compart- Operating No. of poles Connection ment mechanism width mm 600 800 Direct Direct 8UC door coupling, size 1 3 4 3/4 3/4 Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Height No. of circuit breakmm ers 150 200 200 200 1 1 1 1
N-Link
Mounting plate
Modular door
VL160X
--
8PQ6 000-6BA28 8PQ2 015-6BA24
VL160/250
600
Direct 8UC door coupling, size 1
3 4 3 4 3/4 3/4
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
150 200 150 200 200 200
1 1 1 1 1 1
---
800
VL400
800
4 4
Front, rear Front, rear
250 250
1 1
---
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/19
Siemens AG 2012

Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, plug-in version with direct operating mechanism, for horizontal installation Order No. Order No. Order No.
I201_06911
I201_07283
I201_07323
Circuit breaker Compart- No. of ment width poles mm VL160X 600 800 VL160/250 600 800 VL400 600 800 VL630 600 800 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4
Connection Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit mm breakers 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 300 350 350 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Modular door
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct
--
8PQ6 000-6BA32 8PQ2 015-6BA24
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA38 8PQ2 020-6BA30 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA15 -8PQ6 000-6BA32 8PQ2 015-6BA24 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA38 8PQ2 020-6BA30 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA15 -8PQ6 000-6BA44 8PQ2 020-6BA33 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-6BA45 8PQ2 025-6BA20 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-6BA46 8PQ2 025-8BA11 -8PQ6000-6BA47 8PQ2 030-6BA24 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-6BA48 8PQ2 035-6BA23 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-6BA50 8PQ2 035-8BA14
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, plug-in version with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, for horizontal installation
I201_06911
I201_06906
I201_06908
Circuit breaker Compart- No. of ment width poles mm VL160X 600 800 VL160/250 600 800 VL400 600 800 VL630 600 800 Configuration 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4 3 4 3/4
Connection Operating mechanism
Height No. of circuit mm breakers 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 300 350 350 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Modular door
8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 1 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2 8UC door coupling, size 2
--
8PQ6 000-3BA24 8PQ2 015-6BA14
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-3BA27 8PQ2 020-6BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA12 -8PQ6 000-3BA24 8PQ2 015-6BA14 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-3BA27 8PQ2 020-6BA16 8PQ 6000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA12 -8PQ6 000-2BA84 8PQ2 020-6BA20 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-2BA87 8PQ2 025-6BA10 8PQ6 000-3BA53 8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA08 -8PQ6 000-3BA01 8PQ2 030-6BA15 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA10 8PQ2 035-6BA15 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-4BA45 8PQ2 035-8BA12 Order No. Order No. Order No.
3VL moulded case circuit breakers with RCD, plug-in version, for horizontal installation
I201_06911
I201_07283
I201_07323
Circuit breaker Compart- Operating mechanism ment width mm VL160X 600 800 VL160/250 600 Direct Direct Direct
No. of poles 3 4 3/4 3 4
Connection
Height No. of cir- N-Link cuit mm breakers 150 200 200 200 150 200 150 200 200 200 250 250 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --
Mounting plate
Modular door
8PQ6 000-6BA33 8PQ2 015-6BA24
8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA40 8PQ2 020-6BA31 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA12 --8PQ6 000-6BA33 8PQ2 015-6BA25 8PQ6 000-2BA75 8PQ2 015-6BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA40 8PQ2 020-6BA32 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-2BA81 8PQ2 020-6BA17 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA15 8PQ6 000-3BA52 8PQ6 000-4BA43 8PQ2 020-8BA12 --8PQ6 000-6BA46 8PQ2 025-8BA11 8PQ6 000-4BA44 8PQ2 025-8BA08
8UC door coupling, size 1 3/4
8UC door coupling, size 1 3 4 800 VL400 800 Direct Direct 3/4 4 8UC door coupling, size 1 3/4 8UC door coupling, size 2 4
6/20
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

for vertical installation with modular door

General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. The modular door kit with degree of protection IP4X with holes for 8UC door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms or cutout for direct operating mechanism is made up of a door, hinges, individual covers and fasteners. The N-Link kit includes a support, cover and fasteners. In the 4-pole mounting plate and 3-pole moulded case circuit breaker combination this kit provides the internal separation for a branch unit.
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version with direct operating mechanism, for vertical installation
Note For horizontal installation and front connections, extended terminal covers have to be ordered. A combination of front frame and covers with modular doors in a cubicle is not possible. For degree of protection IP55 an upgrade to IP55 is available (see page 7/8 "Modular Doors").
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06917
I201_07283
I201_07323
Circuit breaker
No. of poles
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height
mm 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Direct Direct Direct Direct 600 800 800 900
No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Modular door
VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
600 600 600 600
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, for vertical installation
I201_06917
NSE0_01544
NSE0_01547
Circuit breaker
No. of poles
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height
mm 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 Front, rear Rear Front Front, rear Rear Front Front, rear Rear Front Front, rear Rear Front 8UC door coupling size 2 550 8UC door coupling size 2 400 8UC door coupling size 2 600 8UC door coupling size 2 550 8UC door coupling size 2 600 8UC door coupling size 2 800 8UC door coupling size 3 550 8UC door coupling size 3 600 8UC door coupling size 3 800 8UC door coupling size 3 550 8UC door coupling size 3 700 8UC door coupling size 3 900
No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N-Link support
Mounting plate
Modular door
VL630
400 600
8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-4BA60 8PQ2 055-4BA13 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA05 8PQ2 040-6BA16 8PQ6 000-3BA54 8PQ6 000-3BA05 8PQ2 060-6BA17 8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-4BA87 8PQ2 055-4BA13 8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-3BA07 8PQ2 060-6BA10 8PQ6 000-3BA55 8PQ6 000-3BA07 8PQ2 080-6BA05 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-4BA61 8PQ2 055-4BA14 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-3BA11 8PQ2 060-6BA11 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-3BA11 8PQ2 080-6BA06 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-4BA61 8PQ2 055-4BA14 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-3BA12 8PQ2 070-6BA02 8PQ6 000-3BA56 8PQ6 000-3BA12 8PQ2 090-6BA01
VL800
400 600
VL1250
400 600
VL1600
400 600
Contact protection covers over cable connection
I201_07390
Circuit breaker VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
Compartment width mm 400 400 400 400
No. of poles
Height mm
Contact protection cover 8PQ5 000-3BA15 8PQ5 000-3BA15 8PQ5 000-3BA15 8PQ5 000-3BA15
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
400 400 400 400
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/21
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3VT moulded case circuit breakers
Overview
2 2 2
1 Assembly kit for 3VT1, fixed, vertical 2 Assembly kit for 3VT2, fixed, horizontal with mechanical lock 3 Assembly kit for 3VT3, draw-out, vertical
I201_18209
6/22
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3VT moulded case circuit breakers for horizontal installation

General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. For installation on the front frame, a choice of covers includes versions suitable for direct and motorised operating mechanisms. The covers are secured to the front frame by means of fast closing screws. Hinges for fitting to the individual covers are available as an option.
Configuration 3VT moulded case circuit breakers, fixed and plug-in version, for horizontal installation
Note Before mounting and connecting, read the operating instructions and the manual issued for the device by its manufacturer.
Order No.
Order No.
6
I201_06939 I201_06940
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm 6001) 600 600 600 600
No. of poles 3/4 3 4 3 4
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height mm
No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 1 1
Mounting plate
Cover
3VT1 (160 A) 3VT2 (250 A) 3VT2 (250 A) 3VT3 (630 A) 3VT3 (630 A)
1)
Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear
Direct Direct, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised
150 150 200 200 250
Mounting plate can be used only for fixed version.
3VT moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, for horizontal installation
I201_06941
I201_06942
Circuit breaker
No. of poles 3/4 3/4
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height mm
No. of circuit breakers 1 1
Mounting plate
Cover
3VT2 (250 A) 3VT3 (630 A)
Direct, motorised Direct, motorised
250 300
8PQ6 000-4BA22 8PQ6 000-4BA25
8PQ2 025-6BA13 8PQ2 030-6BA20
Mechanical interlock, 3VT moulded case circuit breakers, for horizontal installation The mechanical interlock assembly kit contains a device holder with holes to fit the locking elements, the supporting rails and the fasteners. Note: For the mechanical coupling of 2 circuit breakers installed in the horizontal position use the mechanical interlocking assembly kit and the relative breaker accessories.
I201_06943 I201_06960
Circuit breaker
Height mm 100
Mounting plate
Cover
3VT2, 3VT3
600
8PQ6 000-4BA34
8PQ2 010-6BA01
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/23
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3VT moulded case circuit breakers for vertical installation

General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. For installation on the front frame, a choice of covers includes versions suitable for direct and motorised operating mechanisms. The covers are secured to the front frame by means of fast closing screws. Hinges for fitting to the individual covers are available as an option.
Configuration 3VT moulded case circuit breakers, fixed version, for vertical installation
Note Before mounting and connecting, read the operating instructions and the manual issued for the device by its manufacturer. For voltages > 415 V, additional safety clearances are necessary.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06932
I201_06946
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm 600
Operating mech- No. of poles anism Direct Motorised 3 4 3 4
Connection
Height mm
No. of Mounting plate circuit breakers 1 ... 5 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 ... 2
Cover
3VT1 (160A)
Front Front Front Front
250 250 250 250
3VT moulded case circuit breakers, fixed and plug-in version, for vertical installation
I201_06947
I201_06948
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm a, b a, b 600 600
No. of poles
Connection
Operating mechanism Direct, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised
Height mm
No. of Mounting plate circuit breakers 1 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 ... 2 1 ... 2
Cover
3VT2 (250A) 3VT3 (630A)
3 4 3 4
350 350 400 400
a Front terminal bars and a breaking capacity of 35 kA require two additional covers, 150 mm each. Moreover, the phase separators and the terminal covers have to ordered. b Front terminal bars and a breaking capacity of 65 kA require two additional covers, 250 mm each. Moreover, the phase separators and the terminal covers have to ordered.
6/24
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3VT moulded case circuit breakers for vertical installation
Configuration 3VT moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, for vertical installation Order No. Order No.
I201_06947
I201_06948
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm a, b a, b 600 600
No. of poles
Connection
Operating mechanism Direct, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised Direct, motorised
Height mm
No. of Mounting plate circuit breakers 1 ... 2 1 ... 2 1 ... 2 1
Cover
3VT2 (250A) 3VT3 (630A)
3 4 3 4
350 350 400 400
a Front terminal bars and a breaking capacity of 35 kA require two additional covers, 150 mm each. Moreover, the phase separators and the terminal covers have to ordered. b Front terminal bars and a breaking capacity of 65 kA require two additional covers, 250 mm each. Moreover, the phase separators and the terminal covers have to ordered.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/25
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3K switch disconnectors
Overview
6
4 3
1 Front frame 2 Assembly kit for 3KL, horizontal 3 Assembly kit for 3KL, vertical 4 Cover for 3KL with 8UC door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
6/26
Siemens LV 56 2011
I201_18392
Siemens AG 2012

6
9
NSE0_01557e
6 8 7 2 3KL basic device Fuses, optionally BS-88 or LV HRC fuses 3 Terminal cover, IP20 (vertical to operator side) Coupling driver with extension shaft Standard products from the Siemens 3SB1 range are used as auxiliary switches. Single-pole terminal cover from 63 A to 630 A, IP20 (vertical to operator side) All components from the switch to the actuator are provided with non-interchangeability features.
Optional
7
8UC9 knob for fixed mounting in standard version (black) or EMERGENCY-STOP version (red), or 8UC7 door-coupling rotary operating mechanism in standard version (ti-grey) or EMERGENCY-STOP version (red/yellow)
9 4. Pole (optional)
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/27
Siemens AG 2012

Standards Type IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-3, VDE 0660 Part 107 3KL50 A Size mm2 Nm 63 00 and 000 35 6 .. 7.5 M6 3KL52 125 00 and 000 70 7 ... 10 M6 3KL53 160 00 and 000 120 18 ... 22 M8 3KL551) 250 1 and 2 150 35 ... 45 M10 3KL571) 400 1 and 2 2 150 or 1 240 35 ... 45 M10 3KL611) 630 3 and 2 2 240 56 M12
3KL5, 3KL6
Rated continuous current Iu for fuse links according to DIN 43620 Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Tightening torque Connecting screws
1)
Technical specifications for CSA approval upon request.
3KA71 1
Rated continuous current Iu Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Busbar size A 32 45 50 16 3 200 120 20 5 400 2 150 2 25 5 ---1000 -2 50 6 2000 -2 80 10 45 25 12 3 125 70 16 4 250 120 25 4 400 240 32 5 800 2 185 2 40 6 63 50 16 3 250 120 20 5 ------1250 -2 50 8 2500 -3 80 10 63 25 12 3 160 70 16 4 ---------80 50 16 3 ---------1600 -3 50 8 3150 -100 50 16 3 ---------2000 -3 50 12 --125 50 16 3 ---------2500 -4 50 12 ---------------------------3150 -8 50 12 ------------------mm2 50 mm2 16 3 A 160
3KA71 2
Rated continuous current Iu Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Busbar size mm2 120 mm2 20 5 A 315
3KA71 3
Rated continuous current Iu Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Busbar size mm2 2 150 mm2 2 25 5 A 630
3KA71 4
3KA71 5
3KA71 6
Rated continuous current Iu Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Busbar size mm2 -mm2 2 80 10 A 32
2 100 10 -80 25 12 3 ----------------------------
3KL71 1
3KL71 2
3KL71 3
3KL71 4
3KL71 5
Rated continuous current Iu Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Busbar size mm2 2 185 mm2 2 40 6
6/28
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012


General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. The cover has a cut-out for the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism.
Configuration 3K disconnectors, fixed version, for horizontal installation
Note The respective terminal covers must be ordered too for the disconnector.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06918
I201_06919
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 a 600
No. of poles 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height mm 300 350 550 200 250 300 350 450
No. of Mounting plate circuit breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cover
3KL50/3KL52 3KL55/3KL57 3KL61 3KL711/3KA711 3KL712/3KA712 3KL713/3KA713 3KL714/3KA714 3KL715/3KA715
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
3K disconnectors, fixed version, for vertical installation
I201_06920
I201_06921
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm 600
No. of poles 3/4
Connection
Operating mechanism
Height
mm Door-coupling rotary 250 operating mechanism 3KL55/3KL57 600 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 350 operating mechanism 3KL61 600 3 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 450 operating mechanism 3KL711/3KA711 600 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 200 operating mechanism 800 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 200 operating mechanism 3KL712/3KA712 600 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 250 operating mechanism 800 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 250 operating mechanism 3KL713/3KA713 600 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 300 operating mechanism 800 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 300 operating mechanism 3KL714/3KA714 600 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 350 operating mechanism 800 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 350 operating mechanism 3KL715/3KA715 b 600 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 450 operating mechanism 800 3/4 Front, rear Door-coupling rotary 450 operating mechanism a Due to the size of its handle, the 1250A/50 kA 3KA715 disconnector requires an additional 200 mm cover. 3KL50/3KL52 Front, rear b Due to the size of its handle, the 3KA715 disconnector can be installed only in versions up to 1250 A/35 kA.
No. of Mounting plate circuit breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cover
8PQ6 000-2BA66 8PQ2 025-6BA05 8PQ6 000-2BA72 8PQ2 035-6BA10 8PQ6 000-2BA51 8PQ2 045-6BA01 8PQ6 000-2BA53 8PQ2 020-6BA11 8PQ6 000-2BA54 8PQ2 020-8BA04 8PQ6 000-2BA56 8PQ2 025-6BA04 8PQ6 000-2BA57 8PQ2 025-8BA02 8PQ6 000-2BA60 8PQ2 030-6BA05 8PQ6 000-2BA61 8PQ2 030-8BA02 8PQ6 000-2BA63 8PQ2 035-6BA07 8PQ6 000-2BA64 8PQ2 035-8BA04 8PQ6 000-2BA68 8PQ2 045-6BA03 8PQ6 000-2BA70 8PQ2 045-8BA01
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/29
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3NP switch disconnectors
Overview
5 2
4
I201_18394
1 Front frame 2 Assembly kit for 3NP1, horizontal 3 Assembly kit for 3NP1, vertical 4 Assembly kit for connection to cascaded distribution busbar system 5 Cover for 3NP1 with direct operating mechanism
6/30
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012


General description The equipment support assembly kit contains a deep mounting plate for front and rear terminal bars and fastening crossbars. The cover has a cut-out for the direct operating mechanism.
Configuration 3NP1 disconnectors, fixed version, for horizontal installation
Note Before mounting and connecting, read the operating instructions and the manual issued for the device by its manufacturer.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_07392l
I201_07394
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm 600 600 600
No. of poles
Connection
Operating mechanism Direct Direct Direct
Height mm
No. of Mounting plate circuit breakers 1 1 1
Cover
3NP1 143 3NP1 153 3NP1 163
3 3 3
250 250 300
3NP1 disconnectors, fixed version, for vertical installation
I201_07393
I201_07394
Circuit breaker
Compartment width mm 600 800 600 800
No. of poles
Connection
Operating mechanism Direct Direct Direct Direct
Height mm
No. of Support for dis- Cover circuit tribution busbars breakers 1 ... 4 1 ... 6 1 ... 4 1 ... 5 8PQ6 000-3BA78 8PQ2 025-6BA18 8PQ6 000-3BA82 8PQ2 025-8BA10 8PQ6 000-3BA78 8PQ2 030-6BA23 8PQ6 000-3BA82 8PQ2 030-8BA11
3NP1 123 3NP1 133
3 3 3 3
250 250 300 300
Configuration Copper connecting kits for 3NP1 disconnectors for connection to cascaded distribution busbar system Circuit breaker Compartment width mm 3NP1 143 3NP1 153
I201_07395
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
No. of poles
Installation type Fixed Fixed Fixed Installation type Fixed Fixed Fixed
Operating mechanism Direct Direct Direct Operating mechanism Direct Direct Direct
No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 No. of circuit breakers 1 1 1 8PQ6 000-5BA72 8PQ6 000-5BA73 8PQ6 000-5BA74 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 8PQ6 000-5BA68 8PQ6 000-5BA70 8PQ6 000-5BA71 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
600 600 600 Compartment width mm 600 600 600
3 3 3 No. of poles
3NP1 163 Circuit breaker
Copper connecting kits for 3NP1 disconnectors for connection to cables
3NP1 143 3NP1 153 3NP1 163
3 3 3
I201_07396
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/31
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 3NJ4 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses
Overview
1 2
4 3
i201_18379
1 2 5
Assembly kit for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnector, vertical Front cover for assembly kit
13 3 Front frame 14 4 Cover for cable connection compartment
6/32
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Type Standards Conventional thermal current in free air Ith 1) in enclosed place Ithe 2) Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated operating voltage Ue Rated conditional short-circuit current with fuses from 40 Hz to 60 Hz 690 V AC Max. rated current of fuses In Admissible fuse cut-off current For fuse kit according to IEC 60269-2-1 or sectioning brackets Degree of protection with closed handle insert with side cover and clamps with open handle insert Power dissipated from main current lines Ith Main conductor connection Connecting screws Flat rails Cable lug, max. (multi-wire) conductor size Tightening torque Bracket/V clamps Fastening screws for installation on busbars tightening torque required
1) 2)
3NJ41 0 3NJ5 0
3NJ41 2
3NJ41 3
3NJ41 4
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-3, VDE 0660 Part 107 A A V 40 Hz ... 60 Hz V AC 160 160 750 690 250 225 1000 690 400 360 1000 690 630 567 1000 690
kA (actual value) A kA (peak value) Size/A
50 160 15 00/160
50 250 28 1/250
50 400 39 1 and 2/250 and 400 IP30 IP10 49 M12 42 240 30 ... 35 25 ... 300 M12 35 ... 40
50 630 52 2 and 3/400 and 630 IP30 IP10 110 M12 42 2403) 30 ... 35 25 ... 300 M12 35 ... 40
IP30 IP10 W 18 M8 mm mm2 Nm mm2 Nm 24 95 10 ... 15 1,5 ... 70 M8 16 ... 18

3)
IP30 IP10 23 M10 42 240 30 ... 35 25 ... 300 M12 35 ... 40
When using different devices, take into account the load factor specified in standard EN 61439 part 1/DIN VDE 0660 part 600, Appendix E The minimum space needed for the casing is 0.185 m3.
A special kit supplied on request is necessary for the 2 x 240 mm2 connection.
Rated currents for the horizontal distribution rails

No. of bars 1 Dimensions mm 60 10 80 10 100 10 Rated current at 35 C ambient temperature IP IP41 1560 1740 2180 IP55 1280 1430 1790
Note: These values refer to normal operating conditions and indoor installation in accordance with IEC 61439-1, in particular with reference to an ambient temperature of 35 C (24 h average). In different operating conditions, the correction factors given in the Planning and Configuration chapter have to be taken into account.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/33
Siemens AG 2012


General description The device holder is made up of crossbars and depth adjustable corner supports for the horizontal installation of distribution busbars. For installation on the front frame there are covers suitable for direct operating mechanisms. The covers are secured to the front frame by means of fast closing screws. The modular door kit is made up of a door in degree of protection IP30, hinges, individual covers and fasteners. Note The device holder is also suitable for use behind a closed door. Kit for the connection of cables from the bottom and from the top. Copper busbars are not included in the kit. Two supports for the distribution busbars must be ordered.
Configuration 3NJ4 disconnectors with front cover
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
I201_06923
I201_06924
I201_06925
Circuit breaker
No. of Installation poles technique 3 3 Fixed Fixed
Height Circuit breakers per kit mm 800 800 1 ... 4 1 ... 6
Device holder
Support for dis- Cover for direct tribution busbars operating mechanism 8PQ2 000-6BA06 8PQ2 000-8BA06
3NJ4, size 1, 2, 3 3NJ4, size 1, 2, 3 Note:
8PQ6 000-2BA48 3NJ5 974-0AB 8PQ6 000-2BA48 3NJ5 974-0AB
To ensure proper function when using the swivel front frame, only the maximum possible number of components less 1 may be fitted. 3NJ4 disconnectors with modular door
I201_06923
I201_06924
I201_07391
Circuit breaker
No. of Installation poles technique 3 3 Fixed Fixed
Height Circuit breakers per kit mm 800 800 1 ... 4 1 ... 6
Device holder
Support for dis- Modular door for tribution busbars direct operating mechanism 8PQ2 080-6BA10 8PQ2 080-8BA05
3NJ4, size 1, 2, 3 3NJ4, size 1, 2, 3
8PQ6 000-2BA48 3NJ5 974-0AB 8PQ6 000-2BA48 3NJ5 974-0AB
I201_06926
I201_06927
Configuration for cable entry from the bottom
Configuration for cable entry from the top
6/34
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Overview
1 2
6
3 4
1 Outer front cover for head compartment 2 Modular door for devices 3 Door for cable connection compartment 4 3NJ62 switch disconnector 5 Outer front cover for PE bar
I201_18393
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/35
Siemens AG 2012

Type Switching capacity Standards Rated continuous current Iu1) For fuse links according to IEC60269 Rated operating voltage Ue with a rated frequency of Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Rated conditional short-circuit current Short-circuit resistance (actual value) Short-circuit switching capacity (actual value) Rated operating current Ie with 500 V AC with 690 V AC Rated breaking capacity with 500 V AC with 690 V AC Operating life overall mechanical electrical (690 V, cos = 0.65) Operat- 1600 ing cycles 1400 Operating cycles 200 Operating cycles W 39 1600 1400 200 1000 800 200 1000 800 200 cos = 0.65 cos = 0.35 cos = 0.95 cos = 0.35 A A A A 480 480 480 1280 480 1000 750 600 750 2000 600 1600 1200 -1200 -1200 3200 1200 2520 1890 -1890 -1890 5040 1890 4000 AC-22B AC-23B AC-22B AC-23B A A A A 160 -160 -160 160 160 125 250 -200 -250 250 200 200 400 400 400 400 400 315 630 -630 -630 630 630 500 kA kA 100 55 100 66 100 55 100 66 100 55 100 66 100 55 100 66 V AC Hz V V 690 50/60 1000 8000 A 3NJ60 0.-1 3NJ60 0.-3 3NJ60 1.-1 3NJ60 1.-3 3NJ60 2.-1 3NJ60 2.-3 3NJ60 3.-1 3NJ60 3.-3 S IEC 60947-1 160 250 400 630 H S H S H S H
Power dissipated (including LV HRC fuses with low dissipation according to VDE 0636 part 2) Permissible operating position Degree of protection (in operating conditions) Main conductor connection Terminal connection - Conductor size (Al/Cu, single or multi-wire) according to DIN 46235 (Cu) and DIN 46239 (Al) - screw dimensions - tightening torque Clamp connection - conductor size (Al/Cu), rn - conductor size (Al/Cu), re - conductor size (Al/Cu), sm - conductor size (Al/Cu), se - tightening torque required
1)
73
114
215
Horizontal IP41
mm2
1 10 ... 95
1 95 ... 240
1 300, 2 95 ... 240
1 300, 2 95 ... 240 2 M12 30 2 16 ... 35 2 16 ... 70 2 35 ... 240 2 35 ... 300 25
M8 Nm mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 Nm 15 1 10 ... 50 1 10 ... 50 1 35 ... 95 1 50 ... 95 10
M12 30 1 16 ... 35 1 16 ... 70 1 35 ... 240 1 35 ... 300 25
2 M12 30 2 16 ... 35 2 16 ... 70 2 35 ... 240 2 35 ... 300 25
Standard IEC 61439 requires that rated uninterrupted current be reduced if busbars are installed in the control board.
Rated currents for the horizontal distribution rails

No. of bars 1 Dimensions mm 60 10 80 10 Rated current at 35 C ambient temperature IP IP41 1560 2100
Note: These values refer to normal operating conditions and indoor installation in accordance with IEC 61439-1, in particular with reference to an ambient temperature of 35 C (24 h average). In different operating conditions, the correction factors given in the Planning and Configuration chapter have to be taken into account.
6/36
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012


General description The assembly kit for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses in horizontal configuration contains vertical bars and busbar supports suitable for 3- and 4-pole versions. The device compartment consists of a modular door, vertical and horizontal partitions and a device holder. Note Depending on the interior organisation of the rack, configure the rack, interior bearing structures with a usable height of 1600 mm, exterior bearing structures and partitions. The assembly kit can be used with racks of 1000 mm or 1200 mm width and 400 mm, 600 mm or 800 mm depth, and it occupies a width of 600 mm. For each assembly kit for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses, configure 8 protective covers 3NJ6 916-4EA00. The 400 mm and 600 mm wide cable connecting compartment can be equipped with standard components for N and PE busbars, and cable supporting brackets. Depending on field conditions, it is necessary to configure a fixed cover before the busbars, a fixed cover before the PE busbars, and a door (for the cable connecting compartment). Max. degree of protection IP41 Copper busbars are not included in the kit.
Order No. Assembly kit for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses, plug-in version, for horizontal installation No. of poles 3/4 Installation technique Height mm Plug-in design 1600 Width mm 600 8PQ3 000-1BA48 1 unit PS/ P. unit
Configuration
I201_06928
Compartment with modular doors for on-site installation of 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses Height mm 200 400
I201_06929
Width mm 600 600 8PQ3 000-1BA50 8PQ3 000-1BA51 3NJ6 916-4EA00 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Protective cover for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses
I201_06930
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/37
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for modular devices
Overview
6
2
1 Assembly kit for modular devices 2 Front cover for assembly kit for modular devices, 3-row 3 Front frame
6/38
Siemens LV 56 2011
I201_18390
Siemens AG 2012


General description The kit for modular devices is made up of support brackets, variable-depth 35 mm multiple DIN rail and fasteners. The multiple DIN rail makes it possible to snap the Sikclip wiring system onto the rear side. The multiple DIN rail can be modified and adjusted for depth as desired even when fitted. The raceway fastening kit contains the support bracket and the necessary fasteners. It is used to fasten a horizontal raceway.
Configuration DIN rail assembly kits for modular devices with front cover, 1-row
Note The multiple DIN rail can be adjusted for a distance from the front cover of 47.5 mm, 56.5 mm and 75.5 mm. The support bracket makes it possible to fit a vertical raceway up to 60 mm in width. For each row, order one DIN rail kit of matching width.
Order No.
Order No.
6
I201_06932 I201_06933
Row centre distance mm 150 200 150 200
Height mm 150 200 150 200
Width mm 600 600 800 800
Modular units 24 24 35 35
DIN rail 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ6 000-3BA37 8PQ6 000-3BA37
Cover 8PQ2 015-6BA07 8PQ2 020-6BA12 8PQ2 015-8BA03 8PQ2 020-8BA05
DIN rail assembly kits for modular devices with front cover, 2-row
I201_06932
I201_06934
Height mm 300 400 300 400
Width mm 600 600 800 800
Quan- DIN rail tity 2 2 2 2 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ6 000-3BA37 8PQ6 000-3BA37
DIN rail assembly kits for modular devices with front cover, 3-rows
I201_06932
I201_06935
Height mm 450 600 450 600
Width mm 600 600 800 800
Quan- DIN rail tity 3 3 3 3 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ6 000-3BA36 8PQ6 000-3BA37 8PQ6 000-3BA37
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/39
Siemens AG 2012

Configuration DIN rail assembly kits for modular devices with modular door, 1-row Order No. Order No. PS/ P. unit
I201_07397
I201_07398
Row centre distance mm
Height mm 200 200
Width mm 600 800
Modular units 24 35
DIN rail 8PQ6 000-6BA52 8PQ6 000-6BA53
Modular door 8PQ2 020-6BA28 8PQ2 020-8BA14 1 unit 1 unit
200 200
Horizontal raceway fastening brackets
I201_06900
Width mm 600/800
Assembly kit 8PQ6 000-0BA16 2 units
6/40
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 8GK4 system
Overview
6 1 4 3 2 1 7 1
6
5 3
I201_18387 I201_18388
3 1 4
1 Adapter for assembly kits for 8GK system 2 Crossbars 3 Uprights 4 8GK Assembly kit
1 Adapter for assembly kits for 8GK system 2 Crossbars 3 Uprights 4 Support for section-high equipment > 30 kg 5 Touch protection cover for 8GK assembly kits 6 Cubicle panelling for IP30 touch protection cover 7 8GK Assembly kit
Modular configuration of assembly kits for 8GK system
Section-high configuration of assembly kits for 8GK system
An adapter and crossbar delivery unit should be ordered for each cubicle for mounting the 8GK4 assembly kit.
One upright delivery unit is required per installation width.
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/41
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for 8GK4 system

Configuration Height mm -Width mm -Width 8GK mm -8PQ3 000-1BA74 4 units Order No. PS/ P. unit
Adapter for installing 8GK system assembly kits for all heights
NSE0_01568
Uprights 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1800 ------------------8GK4 855-2KK02 8GK4 851-3KK00 8GK4 851-4KK00 8GK4 851-5KK00 8GK4 851-6KK00 8GK4 851-7KK00 8GK4 851-8KK00 8GK4 852-8KK00 8PQ3 000-1BA82 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units
NSE0_01569
Crossbars -----1800 350 400 600 850 1100 -250 250 500 750 1000 -8PQ3 000-1BA76 8PQ3 000-1BA77 8PQ3 000-1BA78 8PQ3 000-1BA80 8PQ3 000-1BA81 8PQ3 000-1BA75 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units
NSE0_01570
Supports for section-high equipment > 30 kg
NSE0_01571
Touch protection covers For 8GK IP30 assembly kits 1800 1800 1800 1800 350 600 850 1100 ----8PQ3 000-1BA83 8PQ3 000-1BA84 8PQ3 000-1BA85 8PQ3 000-1BA86 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
NSE0_01572
For 8GK IP55 assembly kits 1800 1800 1800 1800 350 600 850 1100 ----8PQ3 000-2BA45 8PQ3 000-2BA46 8PQ3 000-2BA47 8PQ3 000-2BA48 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
NSE0_01573
Cubicle panelling for IP30 contact protection cover 1800 1800 1800 1800 350 600 850 1100 ----8PQ2 197-0BA11 8PQ2 197-6BA11 8PQ2 197-0BA12 8PQ2 197-0BA13 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
NSE0_01574
6/42
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for modular devices

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: mounting plates, front cover with supports, screws and fasteners Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 150, 300, 450, 600 Width: 250, 500, 750 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports
Configuration Assembly kits for modular devices Row centre distance 150 mm, without N/PE bar External dimensions in mm Height Width 150 250 500 750 250 500 750 Rows/MW 1/12 1/24 1/36 2/24 2/48 2/72 8GK4 351-1KK12 8GK4 351-1KK22 8GK4 351-1KK32 8GK4 351-2KK12 8GK4 351-2KK22 8GK4 351-2KK32 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Note To mount the assembly kits you must order an adapter delivery unit, upright (per width) and crossbar (see page 6/42).
6
I201_03088
300
I201_03090
450
250 500 750
3/36 3/72 3/108
8GK4 351-3KK12 8GK4 351-3KK22 8GK4 351-3KK32
I201_03092
600
250 500 750
4/48 4/96 4/144
8GK4 351-4KK12 8GK4 351-4KK22 8GK4 351-4KK32
I201_03094
The assembly kits with a width of 250 mm come with 7.5 mm DIN rails. The assembly kits with widths of 500/750 mm come with 15 mm DIN rails.
MW = Modular Width
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/43
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for terminal blocks

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: mounting plates, front cover with supports, screws and fasteners Dimensions of assembly kits, horizontal (mm) Height: 150, 300, 450 Width: 250, 500, 750 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 Dimensions of assembly kits, vertical (mm) Height: 300, 450, 600 Width: 250, 500, 750 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports.
Configuration Assembly kits for horizontal terminal blocks Terminal blocks with graded design, separate, with closed front cover External dimensions in mm Height 150 300
I201_03099
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Width 250 250 500 750 500 750 8GK4 401-1KK12 8GK4 401-2KK12 8GK4 401-2KK22 8GK4 401-2KK32 8GK4 401-3KK22 8GK4 401-3KK32 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
450
Assembly kits for vertical terminal blocks Terminal blocks, separate, with closed front cover External dimensions in mm Height 300 Width 250 500 750 250 500 750 250 500 750 8GK4 402-2KK12 8GK4 402-2KK22 8GK4 402-2KK32 8GK4 402-3KK12 8GK4 402-3KK22 8GK4 402-3KK32 8GK4 402-4KK12 8GK4 402-4KK22 8GK4 402-4KK32 8GK4 500-2KK20 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
I201_03104
450
600
Front cover assembly kit for measuring instruments
I201_06460
6/44
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits with mounting plates

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: mounting plate, front cover including supports, mounting brackets (depth-adjustable), screws and mounting accessories Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 300, 450, 600 Width: 250, 500, 750 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports Note To mount the assembly kits you must order an adapter delivery unit, upright (per width) and crossbar (see page 6/42). If the mounting plate is fitted so that it extends over several cubicle widths, no upright can be placed in the middle.
Configuration
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Assembly kits with mounting plates With closed front cover External dimensions in mm Height 300 Width 250 500 750 250 500 750 250 500 750 8GK4 451-2KK12 8GK4 451-2KK22 8GK4 451-2KK32 8GK4 451-3KK12 8GK4 451-3KK22 8GK4 451-3KK32 8GK4 451-4KK12 8GK4 451-4KK22 8GK4 451-4KK32 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
I201_03110
450
600
Cubicle-high mounting plates with fixing screws Sendzimir-galvanised sheet steel for mounting on uprights no covers possible External dimensions in mm Height 1800 Width 250 500 750 1000 1250 8GK9 533-0KK10 8GK9 533-0KK20 8GK9 533-0KK30 8GK9 533-0KK40 8GK9 533-0KK50 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
I201_03168
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/45
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for empty sections

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: front cover including supports, screws and mounting accessories Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 75, 150, 300, 450, 600 Width: 250, 500, 750 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports
Configuration Assembly kits for empty sections Gray External dimensions in mm Height 75 150
I201_03120
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Width 250 500 250 500 750 250 500 750 250 500 750 250 500 750 250 500 750 8GK4 501-0KK12 8GK4 501-0KK22 8GK4 501-1KK12 8GK4 501-1KK22 8GK4 501-1KK32 8GK4 501-2KK12 8GK4 501-2KK22 8GK4 501-2KK32 8GK4 501-3KK12 8GK4 501-3KK22 8GK4 501-3KK32 8GK4 501-4KK12 8GK4 501-4KK22 8GK4 501-4KK32 8GK4 501-5KK12 8GK4 501-5KK22 8GK4 501-5KK32 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
300
450
600
750
Assembly kits for empty sections with deep-drawn cover, 40 mm External dimensions in mm Height 300 Width 250 500 750 250 500 750 8GK4 501-2KK13 8GK4 501-2KK23 8GK4 501-2KK33 8GK4 501-3KK13 8GK4 501-3KK23 8GK4 501-3KK33 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
450
I201_06461
6/46
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for 3NP4 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: Support plate, front cover including supports, moulded-plastic cover, screws and mounting accessories Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 300, 450 Width: 250, 500 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports
Configuration Assembly kits for 3NP4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors for mounting on support plate Fixing plate with matching cover and moulded-plastic cover Versions Up to 160 A, for NH000 LV HRC in-line fuse switch disconnectors - 1 3NP40 10 (disconnector left) - 2 3NP40 10 - 4 3NP40 10 - 4 3NP40 10 Up to 160 A, for NH00 LV HRC in-line fuse switch disconnectors - 1 3NP40 70 (disconnector left) - 2 3NP40 70 - 4 3NP40 70
I201_03125
Note To mount the assembly kits you must order an adapter delivery unit, upright (per width) and crossbar (see page 6/42). Copper busbars and busbar holders must be ordered separately. Please order matching 8GK9 711-0KK03 busbar holder separately.
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
External dimensions in mm Height Width
I201_03123
300 300 300 450
250 250 500 250
8GK4 551-2KK12 8GK4 552-2KK12 8GK4 552-2KK22 8GK4 553-3KK12
300 300 300
250 250 500
8GK4 554-2KK12 8GK4 555-2KK12 8GK4 555-2KK22
Up to 250 A, for NH1 LV HRC in-line fuse switch disconnectors - 1 3NP42 70 - 2 3NP42 70
450 450
250 500
8GK4 556-3KK12 8GK4 556-3KK22
1 unit 1 unit
NSE0_01621
Up to 400 A, for NH2 LV HRC in-line fuse switch disconnectors - 1 3NP43 70
450
250
8GK4 557-3KK12
1 unit
I201_03128
Up to 630 A, for NH3 LV HRC in-line fuse switch disconnectors - 1 3NP44 70
450
500
8GK4 558-3KK13
1 unit
I201_01624
Assembly kits for 3NP4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors for mounting on busbars Pole centre distance of 40 mm/60 mm, with matching cover and moulded-plastic cover Type 1 1 NH000 2 NH000 4 NH000
NSE0_01623
Type 2 1 3NP4 015 / 3NP4 016 2 3NP4 015 / 3NP4 016 4 3NP4 015 / 3NP4 016 1 3NP4 075 / 3NP4 076 2 3NP4 075 / 3NP4 076 4 3NP4 075 / 3NP4 076 1 3NP4 275 / 3NP4 276 2 3NP4 275 / 3NP4 276
External dimensions in mm Height Width 300 450 300 450 300 450 300 450 300 450 300 450 450 450 250 250 250 250 500 500 250 250 250 250 500 500 250 500 8GK4 661-2KK12 8GK4 661-3KK12 8GK4 662-2KK12 8GK4 665-3KK12 8GK4 662-2KK22 8GK4 662-3KK22 8GK4 663-2KK12 8GK4 667-3KK12 8GK4 664-2KK12 8GK4 664-3KK12 8GK4 664-2KK22 8GK4 666-3KK22 8GK4 663-3KK12 8GK4 664-3KK22 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
1 NH00 2 NH00 4 NH00 1 NH1 2 NH1
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/47
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: Support plate, front cover including supports, screws and mounting accessories Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 300, 450, 600 Width: 250, 500 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports
Configuration
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Assembly kits for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers Versions 3 and 4-pole - 1 VL160/VL160X - 1 VL160X, 1 VL160, 1 VL250 - 1 VL400 3-pole - 1 VL630 4-pole - 1 VL630
I201_03155
External dimensions in mm Height Width 300 450 600 600 600 250 250 250 250 500 8GK4 701-2KK12 8GK4 701-3KK12 8GK4 702-4KK12 8GK4 703-4KK13 8GK4 704-4KK13 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
For installation with mounted RCD module - 1 VL160X + RCD - 1 VL160/VL250 + RCD - 1 VL400 + RCD
450 450 750
250 250 250
8GK4 720-3KK10 8GK4 721-3KK10 8GK4 720-5KK10
I201_06524
For installation with rotary front operating mechanism - 1 VL160X/VL160/VL250 - 1 VL400 - 1 VL630 3-pole - 1 VL630 4-pole
450 600 600 600
250 250 250 500
8GK4 722-3KK10 8GK4 722-4KK10 8GK4 723-4KK10 8GK4 721-4KK20
I201_06525
Assembly kits for 3KA switch disconnectors on support plate Type 1 3KA50/51/52/53 1 3KA55/57/58 Height in mm 300 300 Width in mm 250 500 8GK4 707-3KK17 8GK4 707-4KK27 1 unit 1 unit
I201_06523
6/48
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for 3NJ4 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: front cover for empty sections including supports, busbar holders on support plate, screws and mounting accessories Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 600, 750 Width: 250, 500, 750 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports
Configuration Assembly kits for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors Versions Pole centre distance of 100 mm, with busbar holder - 4 3NJ4, size 00 - 9 3NJ4, size 00 - 14 3NJ4, size 00 External dimensions in mm Height Width
Note To mount the assembly kits you must order an adapter delivery unit, upright (per width) and crossbar (see page 6/42). The copper busbar must be ordered separately! Attention: Max. rated current of 630 A! If the assembly kits are fully equipped, an incoming feeder bay is required. If mounting the in-line fuse switch-disconnectors with 3NJ49 11-3AA00 busbar terminals, the assembly kits cannot be fully equipped!
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
600 600 600
250 500 750
8GK4 751-4KK13 8GK4 751-4KK23 8GK4 751-4KK33
I201_03158
Pole centre distance of 185 mm, with busbar holder - 2 3NJ4, size 1-3 - 4 3NJ4, size 1-3 - 7 3NJ4, size 1-3
750 750 750
250 500 750
8GK4 752-5KK15 8GK4 752-5KK25 8GK4 752-5KK35
I201_10744
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/49
Siemens AG 2012

8GK4 assembly kits for bus-mounting fuse bases

General description Assembly kits for individual and project-related assembly, comprising: front cover including supports, busbar holders for bus-mounting fuse bases, screws and mounting accessories Dimensions of assembly kits (mm) Height: 300, 450 Width: 250 Section size grid dimensions H W: 150 250 The front cover is sealable as standard and the quick-acting locking connections facilitate fast and reliable attachment to the supports
Configuration Assembly kits for bus-mounting fuse bases for mounting on busbar systems 3-pole Pole centre distance 60 mm 7 NEOZED D02 External dimensions in mm Height 300 450 Width 250 250 8GK4 801-2KK12 8GK4 801-3KK12 1 unit 1 unit
Note To mount the assembly kits you must order an adapter delivery unit, upright (per width) and crossbar (see page 6/42). The Cu busbar must be ordered separately. Two busbar holders are included in the assembly kit.
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
I201_03137
6/50
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Assembly kits for modular devices SIKclip
Max. rated operating current In Max. rated output current In Rated operating voltage Un Rated insulation voltage Test voltage Degree of protection Connecting conductors Type of connecting conductor Colour Operating temperature Applicable standards 250 A at 40 C ambient temperature 63 A at 40 C ambient temperature 400 V AC 660 V AC 2.5 kV, 50 Hz IP20 40 A (6 mm2), 63 A (10 mm2) H07VK RAL 7035 -5 C to +60 C EN 60947-1, EN 60439-3

General description Sikclip is a quick wiring system simplifying the connection of flush-mounted circuit breakers. For direct mounting on the rear vertical CU busbar Fixing with clips onto the back of the DIN rail (top hat rail).
Configuration SIKclip wiring systems Modular width (MW) 12 24 36 Connecting conductors
I201_06991
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
5ST2 520 5ST2 521 5ST2 522 Length 120 mm 220 mm Colour Black Blue Black Blue Black Blue 220 mm Black Blue 5ST2 523 5ST2 524 5ST2 527 5ST2 528 5ST2 525 5ST2 526 5ST2 530 5ST2 531 5ST2 532 5ST2 533
Cross-section 6 mm2
10 units 10 units 10 units 10 units 10 units 10 units 10 units 10 units 20 units 2 units
10 mm2
120 mm
Push-in connector Brackets for anchoring to back of DIN rail (pair)
Siemens LV 56 2011
6/51
Siemens AG 2012

Notes
6/52
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Covers, Modular Doors, Mounting Plates and 19" Racks

7/2 7/3 General data Covers
7
7
7/5 7/6 7/7 7/10 7/11 7/12
Doors/outer front covers Introduction Outer front covers/head compartment doors/base compartment doors Modular doors Modular mounting plates Mounting plates 19" racks
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

General data
Overview
1 2 2
7
3
4
I201_18366
1 Front frame, fixed 2 Covers with ventilation slots, IP40 3 Covers with cut-out for indicators and change-over switches 4 Covers without cut-out
7/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Covers
Overview
The kit consists of a cover and quick-release locks. The covers are secured to the front frame by means of captive fast closing screws. 1/4 turn screws are tightened and loosened by means of a flathead or cross-tip screwdriver. In addition to fastening the cover, the screw also performs an earthing function for the cover. Using the hinge option, the covers may be swung open. The hinges are mounted on the cover and front frame without having to use any additional mechanical parts and also perform an earthing function for the cover.

Configuration Covers without cut-out Width mm 600 Height mm 50 100 150 200 250
i201_06960
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
8PQ2 005-6BA01 8PQ2 010-6BA01 8PQ2 015-6BA02 8PQ2 020-6BA01 8PQ2 025-6BA01 8PQ2 030-6BA01 8PQ2 035-6BA01 8PQ2 040-6BA01 8PQ2 050-6BA01 8PQ2 055-6BA01 8PQ2 060-6BA01 8PQ2 065-6BA01 8PQ2 080-6BA01 8PQ2 005-8BA01 8PQ2 010-8BA01 8PQ2 015-8BA02 8PQ2 020-8BA01 8PQ2 025-8BA01 8PQ2 030-8BA01 8PQ2 035-8BA01 8PQ2 040-8BA01 8PQ2 050-8BA01 8PQ2 055-8BA01 8PQ2 060-8BA01 8PQ2 065-8BA01 8PQ2 080-8BA01
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
300 350 400 500 550 600 650 800 800 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 800 Covers height 200 mm with cut-out Width mm 600 2 instruments 72 72 mm + 2 change-over switches 4 instruments 72 72 mm + 1 change-over switch 800 2 instruments 72 72 mm + 2 change-over switches 4 instruments 72 72 mm + 1 change-over switch Cut-out
i201_06973
i201_07285
Siemens LV 56 2011
7/3
Siemens AG 2012

Covers
Configuration Covers mounting height 400 mm with cut-out Width mm 600 2 instruments 96 96 mm + 2 change-over switches 4 instruments 96 96 mm + 1 change-over switch 800 2 instruments 96 96 mm + 2 change-over switches 4 instruments 96 96 mm + 1 change-over switch 8PQ2 040-6BA04 8PQ2 040-6BA03 8PQ2 040-8BA04 8PQ2 040-8BA03 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Cut-out Order No. PS/ P. unit
i201_06976
i201_06977
Covers mounting height 100 mm with ventilation fins Cut-out: ventilated Width mm 600 800 8PQ2 010-6BA02 8PQ2 010-8BA02 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06978
Hinge for cover hinge position: left / right with closing plugs for cover holes Note Two cover hinges must be used for each cover.
8GK9 120-0KK11
10 units
i201_07277
7/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Doors/outer front covers Introduction
Overview
7
2
1 Outer front cover for main busbars 2 Modular door 3 IP55 upgrade 4 Outer front cover for PE bar
I201_18210
The kit for the head compartment door for the main busbar system and the base compartment door is made up of a door with degree of protection IP4X, door hinge support, hinges and a two-way interlocking mechanism. The head compartment door kit also contains an identification strip. The outer front cover kit for the main busbar system and PE bar is made up of a cover with identification strip and an anchoring support. Configuration For each cubicle with modular doors it is necessary to configure an outer front cover for the main busbar and PE bar or a head compartment door for the main busbar and a base compartment door for the PE bar.
Siemens LV 56 2011
7/5
Siemens AG 2012

Doors/outer front covers Outer front cover/head compartment door/base

Configuration Order No. PS/ P. unit
Outer front cover for main busbars

Outer front covers for head compartment: Height 225 mm Degree of protection: IP4X Width mm 400 600 800 8PQ2 022-4BA01 8PQ2 022-6BA01 8PQ2 022-8BA01 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06981
Head compartment door for main busbars
Head compartment doors Degree of protection: IP4X Width mm 400 600 800
i201_07276
Height mm 225 725 225 725 225 8PQ2 022-4BA04 8PQ2 072-4BA02 8PQ2 022-6BA04 8PQ2 072-6BA01 8PQ2 022-8BA03 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
IP55 upgrades for outer front cover and head compartment door for main busbars Width mm 400 600 800
i201_06982
225 725 225 725 225
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Outer front cover for PE bar

Outer front covers for base compartment: Height 175 mm Degree of protection: IP4X Width mm 400 600 800
i201_06960
8PQ2 015-4BA01 8PQ2 000-6BA07 8PQ2 000-8BA07
Base compartment door for PE bars

Base compartment doors: Height 700 mm Degree of protection: IP4X Width mm 400 600 8PQ2 070-4BA01 8PQ2 070-6BA05 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06989
IP55 upgrades for outer front cover and base compartment door for PE bars Width mm 400 600 800 Height mm 175 700 175 700
i201_06983
175
7/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Doors/outer front covers Modular doors
Overview
The modular door kit is made up of a door with degree of protection IP4X, door hinge support, hinges and two-way interlocking mechanism. The outer front cover kit includes a cover and anchoring support.

Modular door
Modular doors Degree of protection: IP4X. Width mm 400 Height mm 150 200 250 300 350
i201_06989
400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 600 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 800 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 Note A combination of front frame and covers with modular doors in a cubicle is not possible. When using the equipment with modular doors, the remaining heights must be closed with 50 mm or 100 mm height front covers.
Siemens LV 56 2011
7/7
Siemens AG 2012

Configuration IP55 upgrades for modular door Width mm 400 Height mm 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
i201_06980
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
600 650 700 750 800 600 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 800 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
7/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Configuration Outer front covers Degree of protection: IP4X Width mm 400 600 800 IP55 upgrades for outer front cover Width mm 400 600 800
i201_06985
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Height mm 50 100 50 100 50 100 Height mm 50 100 50 100 50 100 8PQ2 005-4BA01 8PQ2 010-4BA01 8PQ2 005-6BA03 8PQ2 010-6BA03 8PQ2 005-8BA03 8PQ2 010-8BA03 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 8PQ2 005-4BA03 8PQ2 010-4BA02 8PQ2 005-6BA04 8PQ2 010-6BA04 8PQ2 005-8BA04 8PQ2 010-8BA04 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06984
Siemens LV 56 2011
7/9
Siemens AG 2012

Modular mounting plates
Overview
The modular mounting plate kit is made up of the mounting plate, crossbars and fasteners. The mounting plate can be ordered with or without holes and can be adjusted for depth and fastened on crossbars.

Configuration Modular mounting plates without holes Closed Width mm 400 Height mm 150 200 300 8PQ3 000-2BA60 8PQ3 000-2BA17 8PQ3 000-2BA66 8PQ3 000-2BA18 8PQ3 000-2BA21 8PQ3 000-2BA23 8PQ3 000-2BA62 8PQ3 000-1BA56 8PQ3 000-2BA51 8PQ3 000-1BA61 8PQ3 000-1BA65 8PQ3 000-1BA26 8PQ3 000-2BA64 8PQ3 000-1BA58 8PQ3 000-2BA53 8PQ3 000-1BA63 8PQ3 000-1BA67 8PQ3 000-1BA28 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Order No. PS/ P. unit
400 600
i201_06986
800 600 150 200 300 400 600 800 800 150 200 300 400 600 800 Modular mounting plates with holes with hole spacing Width mm 400 Height mm 150 200 300 400 600
8PQ3 000-2BA61 8PQ3 000-2BA24 8PQ3 000-2BA67 8PQ3 000-2BA25 8PQ3 000-2BA27 8PQ3 000-2BA30 8PQ3 000-2BA63 8PQ3 000-1BA57 8PQ3 000-2BA52 8PQ3 000-1BA62 8PQ3 000-1BA66 8PQ3 000-1BA27 8PQ3 000-2BA65 8PQ3 000-1BA60 8PQ3 000-2BA54 8PQ3 000-1BA64 8PQ3 000-1BA68 8PQ3 000-1BA30
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06987
800 600 150 200 300 400 600 800 800 150 200 300 400 600 800 Note In mounting plates with holes, the hole spacing is 25 mm 25 mm. The hole diameter of 5.4 mm is suitable for the use of M6 self-tapping screws.
7/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Mounting plates
Overview
The mounting plate kit is made up of the mounting plate and fastening brackets. The brackets are fastened to the side upright or to the rear part of the cubicle. For applications with a heavy load there are reinforced mounting plates made of 3 mm thick sheet steel. To facilitate the installation of the mounting plate, the lower fastening brackets are designed for slanted plate insertion. The connecting panel kit makes it possible to connect two mounting plates which are configured side by side in two cubicles.

By means of 6 additional crossbars the mounting plate can be adjusted for depth. The crossbars are described in chapter 10 Accessories under mechanical accessories.
Configuration Mounting plates, standard version 2 mm Height mm 1600 Width mm 400 600 800 1000 1200 1900 400 600 800 1000 1200
i201_06961
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
7
8PQ3 000-0BA33 8PQ3 000-0BA35 8PQ3 000-0BA37 8PQ3 000-1BA06 8PQ3 000-1BA07 8PQ3 000-0BA32 8PQ3 000-0BA34 8PQ3 000-0BA36 8PQ3 000-1BA04 8PQ3 000-1BA05 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Mounting plates, reinforced version 3 mm Height mm 1600 Width mm 800 1000 1200 1900 800 1000 1200 8PQ3 000-2BA81 8PQ3 000-2BA55 8PQ3 000-2BA57 8PQ3 000-2BA80 8PQ3 000-2BA56 8PQ3 000-2BA58 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06961
Connecting panels for mounting plate Height mm 1600 1900 8PQ3 000-1BA10 8PQ3 000-1BA08 1 unit 1 unit
i201_06975
Siemens LV 56 2011
7/11
Siemens AG 2012

19" racks
Overview
For the installation of a 19 rack, a fixed version kit for 600 mm wide cubicles and a section-high swivel version kit for 800 mm wide cubicles are available.

Configuration Mounting kits for 19" rack Equipment height in mm: 1800 Module height (HE): 39 Cubicle width mm 600 800 Fixed Swivel 8PQ3 000-1BA11 8PQ3 000-1BA12 1 unit 1 unit Installation type Order No. PS/ P. unit
7
i201_06990
Note 1 module height (HE) = 44.45 mm. Swivel frame for left and right hinge position. The maximum weight of the equipment which can be installed is 160 kg.
7/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
8/2 8/4 8/7 General data
8
Main busbar systems Distribution busbar systems SENTRON protection and switching devices 3WL protection and switching devices 3VL, 3VT, 3K, 3NP protection and switching devices 3VL protection and switching devices, rear connection 3NJ4, 3NJ6 protection and switching devices 8/10 8/12 8/17 8/21
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
General data
Overview
Internal separation is achieved with partitions, covers and device enclosures. Enclosed protected compartments are thus created. Internal separation results in a higher level of safety for people and equipment. Benefits Reduction of possible hazards during connection, scheduled maintenance and extraordinary maintenance operations Attenuation of the consequences of local faults and faster resumption of regular operation Applications Protection against contact between live parts belonging to adjacent functional units; degree of protection required: IPXXB or higher; and/or Protection against the intrusion of foreign bodies from a functional unit into an adjacent functional unit; degree of protection required: IP2X or higher; and Protection against accidental contact with hazardous parts in the functional unit.
Definitions according to IEC 61439-1 and EN 61439-1
Form 1 Form 2 Form 2a Form 2b Form 3 No internal separation Separation between busbars and functional units No separation between connections and busbars Separation between connections and busbars Separation between busbars and all functional units Separation between all the functional units Separation between the connections of conductors going to the exterior and the functional units, but no separation between the connections and the functional units Form 3a Form 3b Form 4 No separation between connections and busbars Separation between connections and busbars Separation between busbars and all functional units Separation between all the functional units Separation between the connections of conductors going to the exterior which are associated with functional units and the connections of all the other functional units and the busbars Form 4a Form 4b Connections in the same cell as the functional unit concerned Connections not in the same cell as the functional unit concerned
SIVACON S4 With SIVACON S4, internal separation form 2b is achieved by separating the main busbar system and the vertical distribution busbars by means of partitions and covers. Therefore assembly kits for protection and switching devices which comply with internal separation form 1 in their basic version do not require any additional separation to achieve form of internal separation 2b. If only one circuit breaker per cubicle is used, form 3b corresponds to form 4b (3b = 4b).
8/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
General data
1 2 2
Legend:
Functional units
4
4 4 3 4 4 4 4
Input and output connections 1 = Main busbars 2 = Vertical distribution busbars 3 = Input circuit 4 = Output circuit
I201_18216
Form 1
1 2 2
1 2 2
4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4 4
I201_18217
I201_18218
Form 2a
Form 2b
1 2 2
1 2 2
4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4 4
I201_18219
I201_18220
Form 3a
Form 3b
1 2 2
1 2 2
4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4 4
I201_18221
I201_18222
Form 4a
Form 4b
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/3
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Main busbar systems
Overview
i201_07010
i201_07007
i201_07008
Main busbar system in standard position, top front Depth 400 mm
Main busbar system in standard position, top front Depth 600 mm
Main busbar system in standard position, top front or rear Depth 800 mm
i201_07009
i201_07011
i201_07280
Main busbar system in standard position, top front and rear Depth 800 mm
Main busbar system in variable position, variable rear Depth 800 mm
Main busbar system at rear with vertical bar configuration
8/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Main busbar systems
The form of internal separation 2b kit for main busbar systems contains the parts and fastening screws needed to achieve this separation form.
Configuration
One unit per cubicle corresponding to the relative dimensions for equipment compartment or cable compartment. To use a section as a riser duct it is necessary to use a side upright matching the equipment height and depth, with no bottom plate partition crossbar. For form of internal separation 2b from the master busbar in combination with kits for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses there is a special partition.

Configuration Main busbar systems in standard position top with horizontal bar arrangement, form of internal separation 2b Height: 225 mm Cubicle depth mm 400 Front Position of main busbar system Compartment width mm 200 350 400
i201_07000
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
8PQ3 000-1BA52 8PQ3 000-2BA68 8PQ3 000-0BA67 8PQ3 000-0BA68 8PQ3 000-0BA70 8PQ3 000-2BA70 8PQ3 000-1BA13 8PQ3 000-1BA15 8PQ3 000-1BA53 8PQ3 000-2BA71 8PQ3 000-0BA52 8PQ3 000-0BA53 8PQ3 000-0BA54 8PQ3 000-2BA72 8PQ3 000-1BA14 8PQ3 000-1BA16 8PQ3 000-1BA54 8PQ3 000-2BA73 8PQ3 000-0BA55 8PQ3 000-0BA56 8PQ3 000-0BA57 8PQ3 000-2BA74 8PQ3 000-1BA17 8PQ3 000-1BA18 8PQ3 000-1BA55 8PQ3 000-2BA75 8PQ3 000-0BA58 8PQ3 000-0BA60 8PQ3 000-0BA61 8PQ3 000-2BA76 8PQ3 000-1BA20 8PQ3 000-1BA21
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
600 800 850 1000 1200 600 Front 200 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 800 Front or rear 200 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 Front and rear 200 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/5
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Main busbar systems
Configuration Main busbar systems in variable position rear, form of internal separation 2b Height: 250 mm Cubicle depth mm Position of main busbar system Compartment width mm 350 400 600 800
i201_07002
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
4001), 6001), 800 Variable
850 1000 1200

1)
With modular doors
Main busbar systems in position rear with vertical bar arrangement, form of internal separation 2b Cubicle depth mm 400 Position of main busbar system Rear top/middle/bottom Compartment width mm 350 400 600 800 850 600 Rear top/bottom 350 400 600
i201_07340
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
850
8/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Overview
The form of internal separation 2b kit for distribution busbar systems contains the parts and fasteners needed to achieve this separation form.
Configuration
For cubicles placed side-by-side, order an additional separation kit to obtain form 2b for the vertical busbars or separation between cubicles. The protective front separation cannot be fitted to the back of 400 mm deep cubicles.
1 2b form of internal separation for main busbar 2 2b form of internal separation for vertical distribution busbar
I201_18223
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/7
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation

Configuration Vertical distribution busbar systems with main busbars at the top, form of internal separation 2b Position of main busbar system Front Cubicle depth mm 400 Compartment width mm 200, 400 8PQ4 000-0BA05 1 unit Order No. PS/ P. unit
I201_18212
600
200, 400
8PQ4 000-0BA07
1 unit
I201_18213
Front and rear
800
200, 400
8PQ4 000-0BA64
1 unit
I201_18215
Front or rear
800
200 400
8PQ4 000-0BA02 8PQ4 000-0BA01
1 unit 1 unit
I201_18214
Vertical distribution busbar systems without main busbars, form of internal separation 2b Compartment width in mm: 200, 400 Position of main busbar system Front and rear Cubicle depth mm 400 600
I201_18215
8PQ4 000-0BA06 8PQ4 000-0BA03 8PQ4 000-0BA76
800
8/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Configuration Vertical distribution busbars, contact protection covers Height in mm: 1900 Outer enclosure Internal cover Outer front cover/door Compartment width mm 200 200 400 8PQ3 000-0BA50 8PQ3 000-2BA50 8PQ3 000-0BA51 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Order No. PS/ P. unit
i201_06997
Vertical separation between cubicles Height in mm: 1900 Cubicle depth mm 400 600 800 Note The separation between cubicles kit is symmetrically split and is provided with removable pre-sectioning units. 1 1 2 8PQ3 000-0BA15 8PQ3 000-0BA16 8PQ3 000-0BA15 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Quantity
i201_06993
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/9
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
SENTRON Protection and Switching Devices
3WL protection and switching devices
Overview
The separation kit for 3WL circuit breakers ensures rear and side separation.
Cubicle with busbar connections and form 4b separation.

Configuration 3WL circuit breakers, form 3 separation Module height: 550 mm Size Modular cover at the front Door Cover Compartment width Installation type Order No. PS/ P. unit
mm I 400 600 600 800

i201_06994
Fixed/draw-out Fixed/draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Draw-out Fixed/draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
II
Door Cover
600 800 600 800
Note The separations cannot be used for 3WL1240.
8/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
3WL protection and switching devices
Configuration 3WL circuit breakers, form 4 separation Installation type: Fixed version and draw-out version Size Modular cover at the front Compartment width mm I Door 400 Section depth Function compartment Mounting height Above circuit Below circuit breaker breaker mm Cable connection1) Connection to cubicle rail 600/800 Connection to cubicle rail 600 400 Cable connection1) Connection to cubicle rail 600/800 Connection to cubicle rail Cover 600 600/800 Connection to cubicle rail 800 600/800 Connection to cubicle rail
i201_06995
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
mm 400
mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 400 350 400 350 8PQ5 000-3BA86 8PQ5 000-4BA01 8PQ5 000-3BA87 8PQ5 000-0BA30 8PQ5 000-0BA14 8PQ5 000-1BA68 8PQ5 000-1BA67 8PQ5 000-4BA02 8PQ5 000-3BA88 8PQ5 000-0BA38 8PQ5 000-0BA21 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 8PQ5 000-3BA84 8PQ5 000-4BA00 8PQ5 000-3BA85 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
250 250
Cable connection 250 250 250 250
i201_06996
Cable connection 250 250
II
Door
800
600/800
Cable connection 350 Connection to cubicle rail 300
Cover
800
600/800
Cable connection 350 Connection to cubicle rail 300
1)
For size I with door and cubicle depth 400 mm, the form 4 separation for cable connections from the form 4 kit for connection to the cubicle bar is satisfied
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/11
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
3VL, 3VT, 3K, 3NP protection and switching devices
Overview
For assembly kits such as 3VL, 3VT, 3K, 3NP, modular devices on DIN rail and modular mounting plates, a modular separation system is available. The moulded case circuit breaker kits achieve form 1 separation. Form 2b is achieved through the separation of main bars and vertical distribution busbars. Form 4a is achieved through the combination of horizontal, vertical and rear vertical partitions. The form 4a separation kit for 3VL draw-out versions is made up of a combination of horizontal, vertical and rear vertical partitions. Configuration information: The plug-in rail kit is needed for separation form 2b. The plugin rail is used for fastening the horizontal and vertical partitions in the rear compartment without the use of screws. After installing the plug-in rail kit in the cubicle type for simple applications, the compartment can be equipped in section height with type 3VL and 3KL horizontal branch units up to 630 A.
1 3 2 3
1 Separation vertical to the cable compartment on the side 2 Horizontal separation 3 Crossbars 4 Plug-in rails
8/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
I201_18363
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Configuration information: For modular device kits, crossbars must also be configured. 400 mm deep cubicles need one horizontal and one vertical separation for each branch unit. 600 mm and 800 mm deep cubicles need one horizontal, one vertical and one rear vertical separation for each branch unit. When using the copper connecting kit for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, no separation vertical to the cable compartment is needed on the side. For vertical separation with a height of 50 mm you must order two kits for 25 mm height.
8
5 1 5 Separation for 400 mm deep cubicles
2 3
5 Separation for 600 mm and 800 mm deep cubicles 1 Horizontal separation 2 Separation vertical to the cable compartment on the side 3 Vertical separation 4 Rear vertical separation 5 Crossbars
I201_18211
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/13
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation

Configuration Plug-in rails for form 3 and 4 separation Equipment height mm 1600 1800 Note Order one plug-in rail kit per compartment width of 600 mm or 800 mm. 8PQ3 000-0BA82 8PQ3 000-0BA83 2 units 2 units Order No. PS/ P. unit
i201_07006
Crossbars Equipment height in mm: 25 Cubicle depth in mm: 400, 600, 800
8PQ5 000-2BA63
2 units
i201_07014
Horizontal separation Cubicle depth in mm: 400, 600, 800 Compartment width mm 400
i201_07015
8PQ5 000-3BA44 8PQ5 000-2BA61 8PQ5 000-2BA62
600 800 Separation vertical to the cable compartment on the side Cubicle depth in mm: 400, 600, 800 Mounting height mm 25 100 150 200 250 300 Branch current A --- 250 400 250 400 250 400 800 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 - 800 -- 800 -- 800 --
8PQ5 000-2BA63 8PQ5 000-2BA27 8PQ5 000-2BA28 8PQ5 000-2BA30 8PQ5 000-2BA31 8PQ5 000-2BA32 8PQ5 000-2BA33 8PQ5 000-2BA34 8PQ5 000-2BA35 8PQ5 000-2BA46 8PQ5 000-2BA36 8PQ5 000-3BA48 8PQ5 000-2BA37 8PQ5 000-3BA50 8PQ5 000-2BA38 8PQ5 000-2BA65 8PQ5 000-2BA40 8PQ5 000-2BA66 8PQ5 000-2BA41 8PQ5 000-2BA42 8PQ5 000-2BA48 8PQ5 000-2BA43 8PQ5 000-2BA44 8PQ5 000-2BA50 8PQ5 000-2BA45
2 units 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07016
8/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Configuration Rear vertical separation Cubicle depth in mm: 600, 800 Compartment width mm 600 Mounting height mm 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
i201_07017
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
450 550 800 50 100 200 250 350 400 450 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, horizontal, form 4a separation Compart- Cubicle depth Circuit ment width breaker mm 600 mm 400 VL160/250 3/4 VL400 VL630 VL630 600, 800 3/4 3 4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 No. of poles Branch height mm 250 300 300 350 250 300
1)
Cable connection Front Front Front Front Front, rear Front, rear Front, rear Front Front Front Front, rear Front, rear 8PQ5 000-2BA75 8PQ5 000-2BA76 8PQ5 000-2BA77 8PQ5 000-2BA80 8PQ5 000-2BA86 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 8PQ5 000-1BA76 8PQ5 000-1BA77 8PQ5 000-1BA81 8PQ5 000-1BA80 8PQ5 000-1BA82 8PQ5 000-1BA84 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
VL160/250 3/4 VL400 VL630
i201_07018
800
400
VL160/250 3/4 VL400 VL630
250 300 350 250 300

1)
600, 800
VL160/250 3/4 VL400 VL630 to VL1600
1)
Select separations according to the dimensions from modular separation kits for vertical side and/or rear.
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/15
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, draw-out version, vertical, form 4a separation Compart- Circuit ment width breaker mm 600 VL160/250 VL400/630 VL800 3/4 3/4 3/4 No. of poles Cubicle depth mm Branch height mm Front, rear Front Front, rear Front, rear 8PQ5 000-1BA86 8PQ5 000-1BA87 8PQ5 000-1BA88 8PQ5 000-2BA00 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Cable connection Order No. PS/ P. unit
400, 600, 800 350 400, 600, 800 400 600, 800 600, 800 600 650
VL1250/1600 3/4
i201_07019
800
VL160/250 VL400/630
3/4 3/4
400, 600, 800 350 400
8PQ5 000-2BA01 8PQ5 000-2BA02
1 unit 1 unit
i201_07020
Connecting terminals, upgrade for separation 4a to 3b The connecting terminal kit achieves separation from form 4a to form 3b. Separation from form 3b to form 4b is achieved through the combination of connecting terminal and protective bellows. Rated current In A -i201_06998
Busbar mm mm None 2 25 5 1 30 10 1 40 10 8PQ5 000-0BA05 8PQ5 000-0BA72 8PQ5 000-0BA73 8PQ5 000-0BA74 4 units 2 units 4 units 4 units
250 400 630 Note
In addition to the partitions, the required number of terminals (with or without copper busbars) has to be ordered. When using the copper connecting assembly kit for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, terminals need not be ordered.
i201_07003
i201_06999
Protective bellows, separation upgrade from 3b to 4b
8PQ9 400-0BA03
4 units
i201_07024
8/16
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
3VL protection and switching devices, rear connection
Overview
The internal separation kits for 3VL with rear connection combined with the modular components for the vertical distribution bars and the cable connection compartments achieve form 4b separation. Separation of the distribution bars is possible by means of horizontal partitions in sub-segments. The cable connection compartment kits for VL250 to VL1600 include cable connecting bars made of copper, while those for VL160 have a DIN rail for the terminals. The terminals are not included in the scope of supply.
Configuration
Each installation compartment requires the basic module for rear connection. It provides the necessary rear vertical separation and is a central mounting point for the vertical separation of the cubicle distribution busbar and the cable connection compartment. Each installation compartment needs at least one horizontal separation module for the distribution busbar. In the case of subsegments, each needs one horizontal separation kit for the distribution busbar.
Front side of the section
8
4 2
3 1 1 5
1 Basic module for rear connection 2 Vertical separation for distribution busbar 3 Horizontal separation for distribution busbar 4 Cable connection compartment 4 Cover plate for cable connection compartment
Siemens LV 56 2011
I201_18380
8/17
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation

Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, basic module for rear connection Compartment width mm 600 Branch height mm 150 200 250 300 350
i201_07305
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
8PQ5 000-3BA65 8PQ5 000-3BA66 8PQ5 000-3BA67 8PQ5 000-3BA68 8PQ5 000-3BA70 8PQ5 000-4BA03 8PQ5 000-3BA77 8PQ5 000-3BA78 8PQ5 000-3BA80 8PQ5 000-4BA04 8PQ5 000-4BA05
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
400 800 200 250 350 400 450 Vertical separation for cubicle distribution busbar Compartment width mm 600 Branch height mm 150 200 250 300
8
i201_07306
350 400 800 200 250 350 400 450 500 Horizontal separation for cubicle distribution busbar Compartment width mm 600 800
8PQ5 000-3BA63 8PQ5 000-3BA64
2 units 2 units
i201_07307
8/18
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, for horizontal installation, cable connection compartment for rear connection Versions VL160X, VL160 VL160X, VL160 No. of poles 3 4 Module height mm 150 200/2501) 8PQ6 000-5BA13 8PQ6 000-5BA14 1 unit 1 unit Order No. PS/ P. unit
i201_07308
VL250 VL400 VL630

1)
3 4 3 4 3 4
150 200/2501) 200 200/3001 300 350
Height of compartment for draw-out version. The height of the cable connection compartment does not change and is the same for the fixed version and the plugin version.
i201_07309
i201_07325
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, cover plate for cable connection compartment Versions VL160X, VL160, VL250 VL160X, VL160, VL250 VL400 VL630 No. of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 Module height mm 150 200 200 250 300 350 8PQ5 000-3BA71 8PQ5 000-3BA72 8PQ5 000-3BA73 8PQ5 000-3BA74 8PQ5 000-3BA75 8PQ5 000-3BA76 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i201_07311
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/19
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Configuration 3VL moulded case circuit breakers, for horizontal installation, fixed version, connection module for rear connection The kit is made up of a complete configuration of partitions, copper busbars for circuit breaker connection, cable connection bars, and the cover plate of the cable connection compartment For each rear connection kit it is necessary to configure a basic module for rear connection at the corresponding height. Compartment width mm 600 VL800 3 Direct Motor/door coupling Rotary
i201_07341
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Circuit breaker
No. of poles
Operating mechanism type
Height mm 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 400 450 450 450 450 8PQ6 000-5BA87 8PQ6 000-5BA88 8PQ6 000-6BA00 8PQ6 000-6BA25 8PQ6 000-6BA26 8PQ6 000-6BA24 8PQ6 000-6BA25 8PQ6 000-6BA26 8PQ6 000-6BA24 8PQ6 000-6BA01 8PQ6 000-6BA02 8PQ6 000-6BA03 8PQ6 000-6BA04 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Direct Motor/door coupling Rotary
800
VL800
3/4
Direct Motor/door coupling Rotary
VL1250 VL1600
3/4 3/4
Direct Motor/door coupling Direct Motor/door coupling
3VL moulded case circuit breakers, for horizontal installation, draw-out version, connection module for rear connection The kit is made up of a complete configuration of partitions, copper busbars for circuit breaker connection, cable connection bars, and the cover plate of the cable connection compartment For each rear connection kit it is necessary to configure a basic module for rear connection at the corresponding height. Compartment width mm 800 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
i201_07341
Circuit breaker
No. of poles 3/4 3/4 3/4
Operating mechanism type
Height mm
Direct Direct Direct
500 500 500
8PQ6 000-6BA05 8PQ6 000-6BA05 8PQ6 000-6BA05
8/20
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
3NJ4, 3NJ6 protection and switching devices

Configuration 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors, 3b separation The form 3b separation kit for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors is made up of horizontal, vertical and vertical partitions at the side and rear. Compartment width mm 600 800 Note Order one kit for each 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnector kit. For cable connection from the top you must order a crossbar kit and a horizontal partition with the corresponding compartment width in addition.
i201_07021
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
8PQ5 000-1BA70 8PQ5 000-1BA71
1 unit 1 unit
3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses, 2b and 3b separation Compartment width in mm: 600 The form 3b separation kit for 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnectors with fuses achieves separation of the main busbar and the vertical distribution busbar from the equipment compartment. Horizontal separation is achieved by the 3NJ6 in-line fuse switch disconnector. Position of main busbar system Front Cubicle depth mm 400 600 800 Front and rear Note Order one kit for each 3NJ6 kit. For the cable connection compartment, one 2b separation from the main busbar in the selected cubicle dimensions must be ordered in addition.
i201_07022
8
8PQ3 000-1BA44 8PQ3 000-1BA45 8PQ3 000-1BA46 8PQ 3000-1BA47 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
800
Form 4b separation is realised by device-specific covers. These must be ordered separately.
Siemens LV 56 2011
8/21
Siemens AG 2012
Internal Separation
Notes
8/22
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

9/2 9/4 9/7 9/8 9/9 9/10 9/12 Introduction Filter fans
9
Air-conditioning/cooling units Heat exchangers Heaters Fan heaters Thermostats, hygrostats, hygrotherms, switching modules Technical information can be found at www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support under Product List: - Technical Specifications under Entry List: - Updates - Download - FAQ - Manuals - Characteristic curves - Certificates
and at www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/configurators - Configurators
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Introduction
Overview
Control supply voltage or voltage for switching capacity 24/48 V DC 115 V AC 230 V AC 400/440 V AC
8MR system air-conditioning

Filter fans Standard filter fans, IP54 or IP55 With or without additional EMC protection Cooling capacity 8 W/K ... 282 W/K Air rate 25 m3/h ... 845 m3/h Size 92 92 mm to 292 mm 292 mm Colour RAL 7035 or RAL 7032 Roof filter fans, IP44 Cooling capacity 113 W/K ... 242 W/K Air rate 350 m3/h ... 690 m3/h Size 430 mm 430 mm to 470 mm 470 mm Colour RAL 7035 or RAL 7032 Air-conditioning/cooling units For door and side-panel mounting (recessed) 380 ... 5800 W For roof mounting 410 ... 3850 W Heat exchangers -- -- ---- ---- ------
Standard Air/air (at T = 20 K) For side panel and door mounting 700 ... 1900 W Heaters optionally without or with thermostat 10 W ... 150 W Fan heaters optionally without or with thermostat 100 W ... 1200 W Setting ranges 0 ... +60 C, +32 ... +140 F Thermostats, hygrostats, hygrotherms, switching modules Thermostats, optionally NC, NO, CO contacts Setting ranges -10... +80 C Switching capacities up to 16 A Hygrostats, CO contacts 40 ... 95 % relative air humidity Hygrotherms, optionally NC, NO, CO contacts Setting ranges 0 ... 60 C, +32 ... +140 F 50 ... 90 % relative air humidity Switching capacities 6 (1) A ... 8 (1.6) A Switching modules 16 A Available or possible -- Not available or not possible On request The figures in brackets indicate inductive switching capacities -- - ------ ----- -- -- -- --
9/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Introduction
Benefits
Installing air-conditioning equipment in SIVACON cubicle systems ensures high fault tolerance for switchgear and controlgear assemblies and consequently a high level of availability of machines and plants.
Applications
In cubicles, depending on the immediate surroundings (e.g. presence of hot, cold or moist air etc.), there may be a tendency for the switchgear to overheat or for mould to form. In such cases the cubicles should be air-conditioned. The following air-conditioning equipment is available for this purpose: Filter fans Air-conditioning/cooling units Air/air heat exchangers Heaters/thermostats When selecting the individual air-conditioning units, the following factors must be taken into account: ambient temperature, power dissipated from the devices installed, maximum admissible temperatures of the devices, and heat dissipated via the cubicle. In addition, the required degree of protection must also be taken into account.
Optimum, extended air duct for the system air-conditioning
35 C
Hot air from the equipment and busbars
55 C
Cubicle
Cold air recirculation
25 C
9
NSE0_01390a
System air-conditioning optimum air flow
More information
For more information see Industry Mall under "Building Technologies" --> "Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology" --> "SIVACON Switchboards and Busbar Trunking Systems" --> "System Cubicles, System Lighting and Air-Conditioning" --> "SIVACON 8MR System Lighting and Air-Conditioning"
Siemens LV 56 2011
9/3
Siemens AG 2012

Filter fans
Overview
Filter fans are the most cost-effective method - after heat dissipation through the surface of a cubicle and/or ventilation fins in the switchgear enclosures - for dissipating heat from the cubicle. However, the temperature reached inside the board is higher than ambient temperature. Standard filter fans optionally in EMC version When filter fans are used for air-conditioning, the cubicle must have openings which allow electromagnetic radiation to pass in and out unobstructed. Filter fans in EMC version offer additional protection when higher requirements are imposed on electromagnetic compatibility. Filter fan versions The following filter fans are available on request: Standard filter fan IP54, colour RAL 7035/7032 Standard filter fan IP55, colour RAL 7035/7032 Standard filter fan EMC, colour RAL 7035/7032, IP54 Standard filter fan EMC, colour RAL 7035/7032, IP55 Note: For all standard filter fans the useful cooling capacity and air flow-rate are reduced by an average of approx. 30% in combinations of filter fan/outlet filter/filter mat, and for roof filter fans by approx. 40 %.

Filter fans
Degree of protection Size Air flow-rate Cut-out through free intake at 50 Hz m3/h mm Voltage Power rating at 50 Hz W Colour RAL Order No. PS/ P. unit
Filter fans 50/60 Hz except 8MR6 402-2LV41 IP54 1 25 92 92 125 125 177 177 223 223 223 223 115 AC 230 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 230 AC 24 DC 115 AC 230 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 12 12 12 20 20 20 20 20 18 18 18 16 43 45 45 64 64 64 115 135 20 20 20 20 18 18 43 45 64 64 115 135 7035 7032 7035 7035 7032 7035 7035 7035 7035 7032 7035 7032 7035 7032 7035 7035 7032 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 8MR6 411-5LV10 8MR6 423-2LV10 8MR6 423-5LV10 8MR6 411-5LV25 8MR6 423-2LV25 8MR6 423-5LV25 8MR6 411-5LV30 8MR6 423-5LV30 8MR6 411-5LV45 8MR6 423-2LV45 8MR6 423-5LV45 8MR6 402-2LV41 8MR6 411-5LV41 8MR6 423-2LV41 8MR6 423-5LV41 8MR6 411-5LV60 8MR6 423-2LV60 8MR6 423-5LV60 8MR6 411-5LV80 8MR6 423-5LV80 8MR6 511-5LV25 8MR6 523-5LV25 8MR6 511-5LV30 8MR6 523-5LV30 8MR6 511-5LV45 8MR6 523-5LV45 8MR6 511-5LV41 8MR6 423-5LV41 8MR6 511-5LV60 8MR6 523-5LV60 8MR6 511-5LV80 8MR6 523-5LV80 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
63
3 4
i202_06530
115 160
250
580
292 292 292 292 125 125 177 177 223 223 223 223 292 292 292 292
930 IP55 2 3 4 63 115 160 250

i202_06530
580 930
9/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Filter fans
Size Air flow-rate through free intake at 50 Hz m3/h EMC filter fans IP54 3 4 115 160 250 177 177 223 223 223 223 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 20 20 18 18 43 45 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 8MR6 411-6LV30 8MR6 423-6LV30 8MR6 411-6LV45 8MR6 423-6LV45 8MR6 411-6LV41 8MR6 423-6LV41 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit Cut-out Voltage Power rating at 50 Hz W Colour RAL Order No. PS/ P. unit
mm
i202_06535
EMC filter fans IP55 3 4 115 160 250 177 177 223 223 223 223 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 115 AC 230 AC 20 20 18 18 43 45 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 7035 8MR6 511-6LV30 8MR6 523-6LV30 8MR6 511-6LV45 8MR6 523-6LV45 8MR6 511-6LV41 8MR6 523-6LV41 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
i202_06535
Outlet filters
Size Dimensions Cut-out External dimensions WH mm 105 105 148 148 204 204 250 250 323 323 Mounting depth Cover grille height mm 12 23 26 32 33 mm 4.5 5.5 6 6 6.5 7032 7035 2 3 4
i202_06526
Colour RAL
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
mm Outlet filters IP54 1 92 92 125 125 177 177 223 223 292 292
8MR6 400-2GV10 8MR6 400-5GV10 8MR6 400-2GV25 8MR6 400-5GV25 8MR6 400-5GV30 8MR6 400-2GV45 8MR6 400-5GV45 8MR6 400-2GV67 8MR6 400-5GV67 8MR6 500-5GV25 8MR6 500-5GV30 8MR6 500-5GV45 8MR6 500-5GV67
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
7032 7035 7035 7032 7035 7032 7035
Outlet filters IP55 2 3 4 6 125 125 177 177 223 223 292 292 148 148 204 204 250 250 323 323 23 26 32 33 5.5 6 6 6.5 7035 7035 7035 7035
i202_06526
EMC outlet filters IP54 3 4 3 4

i202_06520
177 177 223 223 177 177 223 223
204 204 250 250 204 204 250 250
26 32 26 32
6 6 6 6
7035 7035 7035 7035
8MR6 400-6GV30 8MR6 400-6GV45 8MR6 500-6GV30 8MR6 500-6GV45
EMC outlet filters IP55
Siemens LV 56 2011
9/5
Siemens AG 2012

Filter fans
Filter mats
Size Dimensions WH mm Filter mats for filter fans or outlet filters for IP54 1 2 3 4 6
i202_06588
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
89 89 118 118 171 171 216 216 283 283
8MR6 000-0AM10 5 units 8MR6 000-0AM25 5 units 8MR6 000-0AM30 5 units 8MR6 000-0AM45 5 units 8MR6 000-0AM67 5 units
Roof filter fans

Air flow-rate Dimensions through free intake Cut-out at 50 Hz m3/h 405 690 mm 345 265 345 265 Voltage External dimensions WHT mm 420 340 108 420 340 108 V 115 230 115 230 Power rating Order No. PS/ P. unit
W 40/45 40/45 100/130 100/130 8MR6 311-5DL40 8MR6 323-5DL40 8MR6 311-5DL42 8MR6 323-5DL42 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Roof filter fans IP 44 for 50/60 Hz, colour RAL 7035
9
i202_06520
Roof filter fans IP 44, colour RAL 7035 Without fan 345 265 420 340 83 --8MR6 000-5DE40 1 unit
i202_06507
19" fan draw-out unit

Power W 45 Voltage V 230 LE 019 8MR2 190-1A 1 unit Series Order No. PS/ P. unit
NSE0_00767
9/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Air-conditioning/cooling units
Overview
Where ambient temperatures are higher than the admissible device temperatures, air-conditioners must be used. All the units operate with CFC-free refrigerants. Air-conditioners dehumidify the air inside the cubicle. Cooling units for door, side panel or roof mounting Two separate cooling circuits ensure that no ambient air enters the cubicle. High-performance radial fans provide for effective air circulation inside the cubicle. Intelligent standard electronic components with maximum customer benefits: Simple temperature control with an integrated thermostat Test mode Temperature limits Start-up delay Door contact function Fault indicator contact On-site diagnostics UL approval CE approval Versions Air-conditioning/cooling units are available in the following versions: For side panel and door mounting For roof mounting
i202_06504
i202_06503
8MR6 cooling units: top left for door or side panel mounting, bottom right for roof mounting

Cooling units for door or side panel mounting, degree of protection IP54 inside/IP34 outside, colour RAL 7035
Cooling capacity W 380 640 820 10502) 15502) 20502)
i202_06546
Rated power W 280 400 440 570 880 1080 1220 1780 2340
Dimensions WHD mm 285 460 180 360 606 212 348 783 215 348 783 215 400 950 233 400 1265 236 500 1270 336 500 1270 336 600 2000 380
2)
Air flow-rate inside/outside m3/h 280/280 330/570 330/570 570/860 570/1050 860/1050 860/1450 1450/1450 1450/2900
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Cooling units for 230 V, 50/60 Hz1) 8MR6 423-5EG04 8MR6 423-5EG06 8MR6 423-5EG08 8MR6 423-5SK10 8MR6 423-5SK15 8MR6 423-5SK20 8MR6 440-5EG30 8MR6 440-5EG40 8MR6 440-5EG60 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
Cooling units for 400 V, 50/60 Hz1) 2900 1780 5800

1)
Top mounting and complete installation in the cubicle possible.
Partial installation in the cubicle possible.
Cooling units for roof mounting, degree of protection IP54 inside/IP34 outside, colour RAL 7035
Cooling capacity W 410 820 1150 1550
i202_06503
Rated power W 270 510 550 810 1190 1210 1630
Dimensions WHD mm 259 264 486 340 340 600 401 415 567 401 415 567 401 415 567 492 496 797 492 496 797
Air flow-rate inside/outside m3/h 235/330 330/570 570/1010 860/1820 1050/1820 860/3410 1450/3410
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
Cooling units for 230 V, 50/60 Hz 8MR6 423-5DE04 8MR6 423-5DE08 8MR6 423-5DE12 8MR6 423-5DE15 8MR6 423-5DE20 8MR6 440-5DE30 8MR6 440-5DE40 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
2050 2900 3850
Cooling units for 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Siemens LV 56 2011
9/7
Siemens AG 2012

Heat exchangers
Overview
Air-air principle Heat exchangers working according to the air-air principle use two fully separate air circuits: an internal and an external circuit. A fan draws in cold air from the exterior. A second fan then directs the warmed cubicle air past a large-area finned partition element, which passes the heat to the external circuit. Note: The units are suitable for top mounting and complete installation in the cubicle.
i202_06544
80 W/K heat exchanger
Standard air-air heat exchangers, degree of protection IP54, colour RAL 7035
Thermal capacity W/K 36 80 Rated power W 140 240 Dimensions WHD mm 316 771 93 317 1260 108 Air flow-rate inside/outside m3/h 570/570 1050/1050 8MR6 423-5ML36 8MR6 423-5ML80 1 unit 1 unit Order No. PS/ P. unit
Heat exchangers for 230 V, 50/60 Hz
i202_06544
9/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Heaters
Overview
Cubicle heaters are used to prevent malfunctions caused by condensation formation and corrosion phenomena as well as to maintain a minimum interior temperature. The plastic enclosure is designed such that the surface temperatures on the touchable side areas are kept very low. The heaters are designed for uninterrupted duty. All units are also available in UL-approved versions and for special voltages.
NSG0_00189
Small semiconductor heater, 8MR2 131-0A

Heaters
Heaters, UL-approved, with PTC thermistor 110-250 V AC/DC 15 W 30 W 45 W 60 W 75 W 100 W
NSG0_00197
8MR2 130-1A 8MR2 130-3A 8MR2 130-4A 8MR2 130-6A 8MR2 130-7A 8MR2 130-0A 8MR2 130-5A
2 units 2 units 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
150 W Semiconductor heaters without thermostat, degree of protection IP20, UL-approved, compact design 120-250 V AC/DC 50 W 100 W 150 W
8MR2 131-4A 8MR2 131-0A 8MR2 131-5A
NSG0_00206
Semiconductor heaters with thermostat, degree of protection IP20, compact design 120-250 V AC/DC 50 W, 15 C 50 W, 25 C 100 W, 15 C 100 W, 25 C 150 W, 15 C 150 W, 25 C
NSG0_00188
8MR2 132-1A 8MR2 132-1AB 8MR2 132-0A 8MR2 132-0AB 8MR2 132-5A 8MR2 132-5AB
Siemens LV 56 2011
9/9
Siemens AG 2012

Fan heaters
Overview
Where higher heating outputs (from 150 W) are required, fan heaters are used. The integrated fans provide for better air circulation and hereby achieve a more even air temperature distribution in the cubicle. All units are also available in UL-approved versions and for special voltages.
NSG0_00185
Fan heater with integrated thermostat or hygrostat

Fan heaters
Fan heaters in standard version
9
i202_06591
Without fan, UL-approved - 230 V AC, 100 W - 230 V AC, 150 W - 230 V AC, 200 W - 230 V AC, 300 W - 230 V AC, 400 W With fan, UL-certified - 230 V AC, 100 W - 230 V AC, 150 W - 230 V AC, 200 W - 230 V AC, 300 W - 230 V AC, 400 W
i202_06592
8MR2 140-0A 8MR2 140-1A 8MR2 140-2A 8MR2 140-3A 8MR2 140-4A
8MR2 140-0B 8MR2 140-1B 8MR2 140-2B 8MR2 140-3B 8MR2 140-4B
Compact fan heaters With fan, UL-certified - 230 V AC, 250 W - 230 V AC, 400 W - 120 V AC, 250 W - 120 V AC, 400 W With fan - 24 V DC, 250 W
i202_06590
8MR2 122-4A 8MR2 122-8A 8MR2 122-4B 8MR2 122-8B 8MR2 122-4AB 8MR2 122-4AC 8MR2 140-6C 8MR2 140-6D
1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
- 48 V DC, 250 W Without fan, UL-approved - 230 V AC, 600 W With fan - 230 V AC, 600 W Fan heaters with integrated thermostat or hygrostat 230 V AC, 950 W Fan heater, UL-approved, for anchoring to the base - Temperature range 0 to 60 C
8MR2 150-0A 8MR2 150-0BA 8MR2 150-0C 8MR2 150-0CA
NSG0_00185
- 65 % relative air humidity Fan heater, UL-approved, for wall mounting - Temperature range 0 to 60 C - 65 % relative air humidity
NSG0_00204
9/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Fan heaters
Semiconductor fan heaters

Fan heaters UL-approved Clip fastener for 35 mm DIN rail - 230 V AC, 350 W, C - 230 V AC, 550 W, C - 120 V AC, 350 W, F - 120 V AC, 550 W, F With fastener - 230 V AC, 150 W, clip fastener for 35 mm DIN rail - 230 V AC, 150 W, screw fastening 8MR2 150-2C 8MR2 150-2D 1 unit 1 unit 8MR2 140-3C 8MR2 140-5C 8MR2 140-3D 8MR2 140-5D 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit
NSG0_00186
PTC fan heaters for anchoring to the base 230 V AC, 1200 W, screw fastener (M5) With thermostat, 0 to 60 C Without thermostat
NSG0_00205
8MR2 150-2A 8MR2 150-2B
1 unit 1 unit
PTC heaters for wall mounting UL-approved, 230 V AC, 1200 W, clip fastener for 35 mm DIN rail or screw fastener (M6) With thermostat, 0 to 60 C Without thermostat
NSG0_00203
8MR2 150-3A 8MR2 150-3B
1 unit 1 unit
Siemens LV 56 2011
9/11
Siemens AG 2012

Thermostats, hygrostats, hygrotherms, switching modules
Overview
Hygrostats Hygrostats are used to regulate heaters/fan heaters so that the temperature increase raises the dew point from a critical humidity of 65% in cubicles and enclosures with built-in electrical and electronic components. This prevents condensation on structural parts and electronic components. Hygrotherms Hygrotherms monitor both temperature and relative humidity in cubicles and enclosures with built-in electrical/electronic components and switch on a heater or fan upon reaching the selected values (temperature or relative humidity). This prevents condensation on structural parts and electronic components. Switching modules Switching modules are electronic relays for the switching of high-power DC devices.
NSG0_00192
Fix thermostat, FTO 01 series, NC contact
Thermostats, hygrostats or hygrotherms can be connected to operate the switching modules. Note: The switching capacity values quoted in brackets refer to inductive loads.
Thermostats Thermostats (NC, NO or CO contacts) are used to control the operation of cooling units, filter fans and heat exchangers, as well as to trigger signals in case of excessive temperatures.

Thermostats
Small thermostats UL-approved, max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 10 A (2 A) NC contact - Temperature range 0 ... 60 C - Temperature range -10 ... 50 C - Temperature range +20 ... 80 C
NSG0_00199
8MR2 170-2BA 8MR2 170-1CA 8MR2 170-1DA
1 unit 3 units 3 units
NO contact - Temperature range 0 ... +60 C - Temperature range -10 ... +50 C - Temperature range +20 ... +80 C 8MR2 170-2BB 8MR2 170-1CB 8MR2 170-1DB 1 unit 3 units 3 units
NSG0_00200
Fix thermostats UL-approved, max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 5 A (1.6 A) NC contact - Temperature range 15 C / 59 F (5 C / 41 F) - Temperature range 25 C / 77 F (15 C / 59 F) NO contact
NSG0_00192
8MR2 171-1BA 8MR2 171-2BA 8MR2 171-1BB 8MR2 171-2BB
- Temperature range 50 C / 122 F (40 C / 104 F), - Temperature range 60 C / 140 F (50 C / 122 F),
NSG0_00194
9/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Mechanical thermostats UL-approved Changeover contact +5 ... +60 C, max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 10 A (4 A) Changeover contact -20 ... +30 C, max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 10 A (4 A) 8MR2 170-1A 8MR2 170-1B 2 units 1 unit
NSG0_00195
Electronic thermostats CO contact, 0 ... +60 C, max. switching capacity 28 V DC, 16 A Twin thermostats NC and NO contact, 0 ... +60 C, max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 10 (2 A) Twin thermostats (Fix) NC contact, 15 C/59 F (5 C/41 F) and NO contact, 50 C/122 F (40 C/104 F) max. switching capacity 250 V ac, 5 A (1.6 A) NC contact, 25 C / 77 F (15 C / 59 F) and NO contact, 60 C/140 F (50 C / 122 F) max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 5 A (1.6 A) or 30 W DC NO contact, 50 C / 122 F (40 C / 104 F) and NO contact, 60 C / 140 F (50 C / 122 F) max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 5 A (1.6 A)
8MR2 170-2A
1 unit
8MR2 170-1E
2 units
8MR2 172-1A
1 unit
8MR2 172-2A
1 unit
i202_06589
8MR2 172-1AB
1 unit
Hygrostats
Mechanical hygrostats UL-approved For regulating heaters/fan heaters so that the temperature increase raises the dew point CO contact, 230 V AC 35 ... 95 % relative air humidity max. switching capacity 250 V AC, 5 A (0.2 A) or 20 W DC min. switching capacity 20 V AC/DC, 100 mA Electronic hygrostats CO contact, 230 V AC 40 ... 90 % relative air humidity max. switching capacity 240 V AC, 8 A (1.6 A), for regulating heaters/fan heaters so that the temperature increase raises the dew point 8MR2 170-1C 1 unit
8MR2 170-1AF
1 unit
NSG0_00190
Siemens LV 56 2011
9/13
Siemens AG 2012

Hygrotherms
Electronic hygrotherms UL-approved, 50 ... 90 % relative air humidity, for simultaneously monitoring both temperature and relative humidity in cubicles and enclosures with electronic components, CO contact 120 V AC, +32 to +140 F, max. switching capacity NC contact: 120 V AC, 6 A (1 A), max. switching capacity NO contact: 120 V AC, 8 A (1.6 A) 120 V AC, 0 ... +60 C, max. switching capacity NC contact: 120 V AC, 6 A (1 A), max. switching capacity NO contact: 120 V AC, 8 A (1.6 A) 230 V AC, 0 ... +60 C, max. switching capacity NC contact: 240 V AC, 6 A (1 A), max. switching capacity NO contact: 240 V AC, 8 A (1.6 A) 8MR2 170-4F 1 unit
8MR2 170-4H
1 unit
i202_06587
8MR2 170-4E
1 unit
Switching modules
Switching modules Electronic relay for switching high-power DC devices from thermostats, hygrostats or hygrotherms 24 V DC, 16 A 48 V DC, 16 A 8MR2 180-1A 8MR2 180-1B 1 unit 1 unit
More information
For more information see Industry Mall under "Building Technologies" --> "Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology" --> "SIVACON Switchboards and Busbar Trunking Systems" --> "System Cubicles, System Lighting and Air-Conditioning" --> "SIVACON 8MR System Lighting and Air-Conditioning"
9/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
10
10/2 10/2 10/2 10/2 Fasteners Fasteners for mechanical connections Fasteners for electrical connections, rectangular profiles Fasteners for busbar electrical connections, with H profiles Fasteners for electrical connections Miscellaneous parts Column ID plate Door and special covers Mechanical accessory parts Flange plates for cubicle type Economic Cable entries for flange plates Electrical accessories Tools Other parts 10/3 10/3 10/5 10/7 10/7 10/8 10/9 10/9
10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Fasteners

Fasteners for mechanical connections

Self-tapping screws, DIN 7500 External diameter Length in mm M6 10 M6 16 M6 20
I201_07034
100 units 100 units 100 units 100 units 100 units
Self-tapping countersunk screw DIN 7500, M6 x 12 Accessories Cap for self-tapping screw RAL7035
Fasteners for electrical connections, rectangular profiles

Square screws DIN 603 External diameter Length in mm M10 35 M10 45 M10 55 M10 65
I201_07035
Note For electrical connections make exclusive use of 8.8 strength class fasteners. Busbar clamps 8PQ9 400-0BA02 20 units
10
I201_06880
Fasteners for busbar electrical connections, with H profiles

T-head screws External diameter Length in mm M10 25 M10 35 Note
I201_07036
8PQ9 500-0BA01 8PQ9 500-0BA02
100 units 100 units
For electrical connections make exclusive use of 8.8 strength class fasteners. Hexagon-head screws ISO 4017 External diameter Length in mm M8 25 M8 35 M12 40 Hexagon-head screws ISO 4014 External diameter length in mm M12 50 M12 60 M12 80 Hexagonal nuts ISO 4032 External diameter M8 M10 M12 Clamping washer DIN 6796 External diameter 8 10 12 Washer DIN 125 External diameter 8.4 10,5 13 Lock washer BN208012 External diameter 8 10 12 Note For electrical connections make exclusive use of 8.8 strength class fasteners. 8PQ9 500-0BA48 8PQ9 500-0BA50 8PQ9 500-0BA51 50 units 50 units 50 units 8PQ9 500-0BA70 8PQ9 500-0BA67 8PQ9 500-1BA33 50 units 50 units 50 units 8PQ9 500-0BA58 8PQ9 500-0BA60 8PQ9 500-0BA61 50 units 50 units 50 units 8PQ9 500-0BA07 8PQ9 500-0BA05 8PQ9 500-0BA04 50 units 50 units 50 units 8PQ9 500-0BA64 8PQ9 500-1BA02 8PQ9 500-1BA51 50 units 50 units 50 units 8PQ9 500-0BA77 8PQ9 500-0BA78 8PQ9 500-0BA88 50 units 50 units 50 units
Fasteners for electrical connections
10/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts

Column ID plate
SIVACON SIEMENS cubicle ID plate 8PQ9 400-0BA06 1 unit
I201_18224
Door and special covers

1/4 turn screw for cover, 2 parts, up to 09/11 8PQ9 400-0BA17 20 units
I201_07043
1/4 turn screw for cover, 3 parts, up to 09/11
8PQ9 400-0BA54
20 units
I201_07345
Hinge kit for cover, 3 parts, with closing plug for hole
8GK9 120-0KK11 10 units
10
I201_07277
Rotary handle with flat cylinder identical key type hinge position: right and left
8PQ9 400-0BA07
1 unit
I201_07033
Rotary handle with two-way interlocking/latching mechanism
8PQ9 400-0BA08
1 unit
I201_07037
Rotary handle with semi-cylindrical profile
8PQ9 400-0BA41
1 unit
I201_07301
Siemens LV 56 2011
10/3
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts
Configuration Semi-cylindrical profile acc. to DIN 18252/18254 8 45 adjustable identical key type Order No. 8PQ9 400-0BA26 PS/ P. unit 1 unit
I201_07038
Door lock with two-way interlocking mechanism
8PQ9 400-0BA40
1 unit
I201_07291
Door hinge for modular and cubicle doors
8PQ9 400-0BA55
2 units
I201_07346
10
Coupling bars for bar lock, with two-way interlocking mechanism/rotary handle with flat cylinder
8PQ9 400-0BA27
1 unit
I201_07292
Coupling bars for bar lock, with rotary handle for semi-cylindrical profile
8PQ9 400-0BA28
1 unit
I201_07293
Locking bars for bar lock, with two-way interlocking mechanism/rotary handle with flat cylinder
8PQ9 400-0BA37
1 unit
I201_07289
Locking bars for bar lock, with rotary handle for semi-cylindrical profile
8PQ9 400-0BA38
1 unit
I201_07290
Bar guide for bar locking systems
8PQ9 400-0BA36
1 unit
I201_07288
10/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts
Configuration ID strip for modular doors Width in mm 400 600 800
I201_07287
Order No.
PS/ P. unit
1000 Inner door strut Height in mm 400 550 600/625 700/725 800 1975
2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 10 units
I201_07286
Cubicle key, 3 mm double bit
I201_07026
Mechanical accessory parts

Crossbars for installation in cubicle width Width in mm 350 400 600 800 850
I201_07029
10
1000 1200 Crossbars for cubicle depth Depth in mm 400 - Note: With side upright also for 600 mm, 800 mm depth. 600 - Note: Cannot be combined with side upright. 800 - Note: Cannot be combined with side upright. Universal mounting bracket
I201_07027
Cable brackets, profile C30 Depth in mm 400, 600, 800 Width mm

I201_07030
8PQ3 000-0BA38
5 units
350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
Siemens LV 56 2011
10/5
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts
Configuration Corner piece to fasten cable brackets Bracket for cubicle reinforcement Order No. 8PQ3 000-0BA73 8PQ9 400-0BA35 PS/ P. unit 10 units 2 units
I201_07031
Aluminium multi-profile rail H profile=35 mm Length=1600 mm
8PQ9 600-0BA01
1 unit
I201_07028
Lifting eyebolts Lifting brackets for cubicle width Width in mm 350 400 600
8PQ9 400-0BA11
4 units
2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 2 units 5 units
10
I201_07032
800 850 1000 1200 Mounting bracket for fastening the cable duct to the rear cubicle upright
I201_07294
Clamp for fastening the cable duct to a horizontal partition
8PQ9 400-0BA52
20 units
I201_07295
Plastic rivet for fastening a cable duct to a clamp
8PQ9 400-0BA53
20 units
I201_07296
10/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts
Flange plates for cubicle type Economic

Flange, ventilated IP40 8PQ2 300-0BA01 1 unit
I201_07268
Flange, unventilated IP55
8PQ2 300-0BA02
1 unit
I201_07269
Flange IP55 for 8HP18 cable entries 8 38 mm
8PQ2 300-0BA03
1 unit
I201_07270
Flange IP55 for 8PQ9 400-0BA33 cable entries 3 45 mm
8PQ2 300-0BA04
1 unit
10
I201_07271
Flange IP55 for 8HC6 900 cable entries 2 75 mm
8PQ2 300-0BA05
1 unit
I201_07272
Cable entries for flange plates

Cable entry 38 mm Number of Cross-section 4 4 ... 12 mm 8HP1 808 1 unit
I201_01261
3 4 ... 12.5 mm
8HP1 807
1 unit
I201_01260
2 6 ... 15 mm
8HP1 806
1 unit
I201_01259
1 12 ... 29 mm
8HP1 805
1 unit
I201_01258
Cable entry 45 mm for cables 1 14 ... 38 mm

I201_06147
8PQ9 400-0BA33
6 units
Cable entry 75 mm for cables 1 14 ... 65 mm
8HC6 900
1 unit
I201_06148
Siemens LV 56 2011
10/7
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts
Electrical accessories
Cubicle lamp Fluorescent tube 11 W SCHUKO socket On/Off switch Magnetic clamp 8MF4 900 1 unit
I201_07039
SCHUKO socket max. 250 V with 6.3 A fuse for mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Socket max. 250 V without 16 A fuse for mounting on 35 mm DIN rail
8MF9 300
1 unit
8MF9 305
1 unit
I201_07040
Limit switch for single door, 1NO, 1NC
3SE5 232-0HD03
1 unit
10
I201_07041
Modular door earthing strip, 6 mm
8PQ9 400-0BA15
10 units
I201_07042
Cable entry for separation
8PQ9 400-0BA16
20 units
I201_07044
10/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Miscellaneous parts
Tools
Bits for screwdriver Torx 1/4, M6 External diameter Length in mm M6 50 M6 200 Cordless screwdriver with case and charger 8PQ9 400-0BA05 8PQ9 400-0BA10 8PQ9 400-0BA22 5 units 2 units 1 unit
I201_07045
Other parts
Solid frame for modular devices for 12 MW Depth adapters for modular devices from 70 mm to 55 mm deep Terminal cover for modular devices Instrument plugs Instrument cut-out in mm: 72 72 96 96 Plastic diagram pocket DIN A4 ID stickers, L1, L2, L3, N, PE 8GF7 770-4 8GF7 770-5 8GD9 132 8GK9920-0KK27 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 set 8GK9 910-0KK00 10 units 8GF9 670-1 5ST3 800 1 unit 10 units
10
Siemens LV 56 2011
10/9
Siemens AG 2012
Accessories
Notes
10
10/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
11/2 11/4 11/5 11/7 11/12 11/13 11/15 11/16 11/20
11
Cubicle and floor anchoring Base and enclosure Enclosure Busbar systems Terminals and busbar arrangement Mounting plates Covers, modular doors SIVACON 8PS duct connections 3VL moulded case circuit breakers with motorised operating mechanism Assembly kits for 8GK system 11/21
11
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Cubicle and floor anchoring
Overview
Cubicle
w Width mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
d Depth mm 400 600 800
h Height mm 2000
Floor anchoring of cubicle without base
11
d mm 400 600 800
L2 mm 350 550 750
w mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
L1 mm 200 250 450 650 700 850 1050
d mm 400 600 800
L1 mm 350 550 750
w mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
L1 mm 260 310 510 710 760 910 1110
11/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Cubicle and floor anchoring
Corner cubicle
11
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/3
Siemens AG 2012
Base and enclosure
Overview
Base
d mm 400 600 800
L2 mm 350 550 750
w mm 400 600 800 1000 1200
L1 mm 250 450 650 850 1050
11
Door, rear panel and side panel, with and without design strip
9 25 rear panel
side panel with design strip
side panel without design strip
door 25
I201_18241
45
Top plate upgraded to IPX1

12 55 Front view Side view 55
Z
w
I201_18243
50
d
I201_18244
11/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Enclosure
Overview
Top plate with cable entry
Width mm 400
Depth (d) mm 400
L mm 265
L1 Min. opening mm 38
L2 Max. opening mm 125
Position Cable entry
11
600
465
38
125
800
2 265
2 38
2 125
d w
600
400
465
38
125
600
465
38
165
800
2 465
2 38
2 165
d w
800
400
665
38
125
600
665
38
165
800
2 665
2 38
2 165
d w
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/5
Siemens AG 2012
Enclosure
Bottom plate with cable entry
Width
Depth mm 400
L mm 265
L1 Min. opening mm 38
L2 Max. opening mm 125
Position Cable entry
11
mm 400
600
465
38
125
600
400
465
38
125
600
465
38
165
800 split 600+200
400
2 665
38
125
d w
600
2 665
38
165
d w
800 non-split
400
2 665
38
125
d w
600
2 665
38
165
d w
11/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar systems
Overview
Main busbar system with horizontal bar arrangement in standard position
11
Main busbar system in variable position
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/7
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar systems
Main busbar system with vertical bar arrangement
Section width Section width - 110 mm *
1745 1665 1585 1505
N L1 L2 L3
1120
11
1040 960 880
495 415 335 255
L3 L2 L1 N
B
*) With main busbar cover, section width minus 120 mm
I201_18370
Front view of cubicle with 3 busbar positions
11/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar systems
Section depth 400 mm 288,5 Section depth 600 mm 488,5
Connection level Main busbar
1562,5
937,5
Connection level Main busbar
11
312,5
Side view of cubicle with 3 busbar positions
Siemens LV 56 2011
125,0
I201_18371
11/9
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar systems
PE bar (see SIVACON S4 manual)
Vertical distribution busbar system, cascaded
11
11/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Busbar systems
Vertical distribution busbar system, non-cascaded
11
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/11
Siemens AG 2012
Terminals and busbar arrangement
Terminal
11
Busbar arrangement
85,0
5,0
30,0
40,0 10,0 10,0 up to 400 A up to 630 A

i201_18292
25,0
up to 250 A
11/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Mounting plates
Overview
Modular mounting plate, with and without holes
Position L in mm
A 86
B 106
F 204
G 210
H 229
I 249
K 264
L 284
126 145 175
11
w in mm 400 600 L in mm 153 253
800 353
w in mm 400 600 L in mm 153 253
800 353
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/13
Siemens AG 2012
Mounting plates
Mounting plates
11
w mm 400 600 800 1200
L mm 320 520 720 1120
11/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Covers, modular doors
Overview
Covers
Cover
85,0 selection door or modular door

i201_18286
Modular doors
11
Position L in mm
F 288
G 294
H 313
I 333
K 330
L 368
170 190
210 229 259
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/15
Siemens AG 2012
SIVACON 8PS duct connections
Overview
SIVACON 8PS with connections to top
w min. 600 500,0 225,0 w/2 500,0 N PE
2000,0
550
B-B
Front
h w
02179
h w d
I201_18284
SIVACON 8PS with connections to bottom
11
PE
A-A
w w/2
2000,0
550
Front
A
min. 700
503,0
h w
h d d
225,0
I201_18285
11/16
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Overview
Cut-outs in top plate for combination of LD with 3WL circuit breaker, size I, 3/4 poles and 3WL size II, 3 poles
mbb at the top - in front
7,0 50,0 d d 202,0 100,0 98,0 196,0 219,0 w w FRONT FRONT

I201_18279
250,0
650,0
11
Cut-outs in top plate for combination of LX with 3WL circuit breaker, size I, 3/4 poles and 3WL size II, 3 poles
7,0 (4x) d
180,0
155,0
90,0
116,0 228,0 250,0
232,0 w FRONT FRONT

I201_18280
650,0
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/17
Siemens AG 2012
Cut-outs in top plate for combination of LD with 3WL circuit breaker, size II, 3/4 poles
7,0 (4x) d d 260,0 157,0 196,0 219,0 w 220 d
11
FRONT
w FRONT
621,5
I201_18281
Cut-outs in top plate for combination of LX05.., LX06.., LX07.. with 3WL circuit breaker, size II, 3/4 poles
232,0 (for LXC05...,LX06 ...)
7,0 (4x) d d 180,0 155,0 312,0 for LX07 ...) w FRONT FRONT
I201_18282
11/18
Siemens LV 56 2011
250
650
Siemens AG 2012
Cut-outs in top plate for combination of LX08.. with 3WL circuit breaker, size II, 3/4 poles
7,0 (4x) d 460,0 650
180,0 155,0
464,0
w FRONT FRONT
I201_18283
250
11
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/19
Siemens AG 2012
3VL moulded case circuit breakers with motorised operating mechanism
Overview
Dimensions for equipment combinations made up of circuit breaker, plug-in base or draw-out frame and motorised operating mechanism.
11
Equipment mounting plate installed in the deepest mounting position. For rear terminal bars, the use of rear vertical partitions is limited.
Type Dimensions when set to ON1) A, above the cover mm VL 160-250 VL 400 VL 630 VL 800 VL 1250/1600
1)
B, above the cubicle mm -12 10 48 43 62
C, above the cubicle door mm -37 -14 23 18 37
50 72 111 105 126
Note: In sectioning position, the dimensions increase from 27 to 32 mm. Take into account the additional space needed when using padlocks.
11/20
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Assembly kits for 8GK system
Overview
11
Cubicle depth 400 mm, mounting depths from front
Siemens LV 56 2011
11/21
Siemens AG 2012
Assembly kits for 8GK system
11
Cubicle depth 600 mm, mounting depths from front
11/22
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

12/2 12/3 12/4 12/6 12/8
12
SIMARIS CFB Configuration procedure Check list for SIVACON S4 Correction factors Internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards Example
12/11
12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

SIMARIS CFB
Overview
Easy planning and configuring with SIMARIS CFB SIMARIS CFB facilitates offer processing and project execution thanks to the following functions:
Price determination/calculation:
i201_00072
i201_00074
Management of project and customer data:
Output functions: list of components, images, SingleLine, bid documents:
12
i201_00073 i201_00075
It is always possible to integrate new products, such as ALPHA small distribution boards, at any time. Configuration of SIVACON S4 low-voltage distribution board with integrated selection of specific equipment and devices as a function of geographic location: Advantages of SIMARIS CFB: Easy to manage Windows interface Integrated product database, updated by download Rule-based configuration with choice of characteristics not depending on product A detailed knowledge of products and systems is not required Possibility to make changes with ease at both offer and construction stage Many output functions Order placement through the Mall Reduced workload
i201_00007
12/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Configuration procedure
Overview
The planning and configuration of low-voltage power distribution boards is an important, cost-determining factor within the scope of power distribution board construction. The following notes are based on a network calculated with a special procedure. This chapter is designed to support the manufacturer of power distribution boards with the planning and configuration of lowvoltage power distribution boards. Additionally, the manufacturer has to comply with international standards and regional provisions. The terms used are explained in the Appendix. Configuration Procedure: 1. Reading of specification and determination of characteristics (check list) Network system, voltage level Transformer power, input currents, short-circuit strength Ambient temperature, degree of protection Mounting type (single-front / back-to-back / free-standing / wall) Arrangement of power distribution board / installation surface (operating and maintenance aisles, escape direction) Type of connection (cable or busbar) Access to cable, busbar connection (front, rear) Cable/busbar entry (top, bottom) Ambient conditions (condensation, chemical emissions) Device installation techniques (fixed, plug-in, draw-out design) Safety requirements (internal separation, resistance to internal arcs) Date of delivery (tender/order) Reserve 2. Configuration of power distribution board (conversion of characteristics into power distribution board technology) Determination of the busbar system Arrangement of incoming feeders and couplings Determination of feeders Feeder-section allocation 3. Optimisation of power distribution boards Optimised space utilisation concerning: - Device selection - Feeder arrangement Cost optimisation concerning: - Device selection - Busbar version (reduced cross-section with centre infeed) 4. Testing of power distribution board configuration Determination of the power loss per section Determination of the section's internal temperature Verification that the sections internal temperature max. ambient temperature of the applied devices Determination of the reduction factors in accordance with the calculated ambient temperature of the applied devices Verification that max. operating current rated current reduction factor If one of the conditions to be verified is not complied with, the power distribution board configuration has to be modified concerning - device selection - feeder arrangement, and the tests must be repeated.
12
Siemens LV 56 2011
12/3
Siemens AG 2012

Check list for SIVACON S4
Overview
Project name: Customer: Planner: Date of delivery: Installation site/height: Ambient temperature: Condensation risk? Harmful substances: Mounting type: Degree of protection to interior: Degree of protection to cable floor: Single-front IP IP Yes WxHxD WxHxD TN-S Reduced Acc. to type test TN-C % TN-C-S Full 100% TT IEC No Which: mm mm IT Room height: mm Back-to-back Wall Internal separation: Form Free-standing m (above MSL) C Relative air humidity: Yes No %
Requirements regarding resistance to internal arcs: Maximum distribution board dimensions: Maximum transport dimensions:
12
Network type: Cross-section PEN/N: Cross-section PE: Transformer power: Rated current of infeed: Frequency: Rated operating voltage: Rated short-time withstand current
25% of external conductor cross-section kVA A Hz kVA
CW
(1 sec.)
kA
I201_18298
12/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Check list for SIVACON S4
Infeed Connection: Access to cable/busbar connection: Cable/busbar entry: Installation technique for switching devices: Air circuit breakers (ACB): Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) 630A: Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) 630A: Switch disconnectors (LBS): Remarks: Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Draw-out Draw-out Draw-out Fuseless Plug-in design Fused Busbar From the front Top Cable From the rear Bottom
Starters Connection: Access to cable/busbar connection: Cable/busbar entry: Installation technique for switching devices: Air circuit breakers (ACB): Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) 630A: Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) 630A: Switch disconnectors (LBS): Fixed Remarks: Fuseless Fused Fixed Fixed Fixed Draw-out Draw-out Draw-out Plug-in design Busbar From the front Top Cable From the rear Bottom
12
Feeder reserve: Empty space reserve: Miscellaneous:
% %
I201_18299
Siemens LV 56 2011
12/5
Siemens AG 2012

Correction factors
Overview
Rated currents and initial short-circuit AC currents of three-phase distribution transformers with 50 to 3150 kVA
Rated voltage UcT Rated value of the short-circuit voltageUkt Rated power kVA 50 100 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
1) 2) 3)
400/230, 50 Hz Rated current Initial short-circuit Ir AC current Ik3) 4% A 72 144 230 288 360 455 578 722 910 1154 1444 1805 2310 2887 3608 4550 A 1933 3871 6209 7749 9716 12247 15506 19438 24503 -------1)
525 V, 50 Hz Rated current Initial short-circuit Ir AC current Ik3) 4% A 55 110 176 220 275 346 440 550 693 880 1100 1375 1760 2200 2749 3470 A 1473 2950 4731 5904 7402 9331 11814 14810 18669 -------1)
690/400 V, 50 Hz Rated current Initial short-circuit Ir AC current Ik3) 4 % 1) A 42 84 133 167 209 262 335 418 525 670 836 1046 1330 1674 2090 2640 A 1116 2235 3585 4474 5609 7071 8953 11223 14147 -------6 % 2) A 754 1508 2420 3025 3783 4768 6058 7581 9349 12120 15140 18932 24265 30317 37844 47722
6% A
2)
6% A 995
2)
1306 2612 4192 5239 6552 8259 10492 13078 16193 20992 26224 32791 41857 52511 65547 82656
1990 3194 3992 4992 6292 7994 9964 12338 15994 19980 24984 31891 40008 49941 62976
ukr = 4 %, standardised in accordance with DIN 42503 for Srt = 50 ... 630 kVA ukr = 6 %, standardised in accordance with DIN 42511 for Srt = 100 ... 1600 kVA
Ik Unaffected initial short-circuit AC current of the transformer upon con-
nection to a network with unlimited short-circuit power considering the voltage factor and the correction factor of the transformer impedance in accordance with DIN EN 60909 I DIN VDE 0102 (July 2002)
12
Correction factors for installation heights over 2000 m above MSL The low air density at altitudes over 2000 m affects the electrical characteristics of the power distribution board. The rated currents are subject to the following correction factors for installation heights above 2000 m over MSL.
Correction factors for installation heights over 2000 m above MSL
In= In <= 2000 m k1

Altitude of installation site up to m 2200 2400 2500 2700 2900 3000 3300 3500 4000 4500 5000 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.74 K1 for the load
Reduced switching capacity for installation heights over 2000 m above MSL If the boards are erected at altitudes over 2000 m, the devices' reduced switching capacity must be taken into account. For the correction factors, refer to the technical documents of the devices.
12/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Correction factors
Correction factors for busbar systems at ambient temperatures of <> 35 C The rated currents for main busbar and distribution busbar systems indicated in the catalogue refer to the ambient temperatures for indoor installation described in IEC/EN 61439-1. Consequently, the ambient temperature for low-voltage power distribution boards does not exceed +40 C and the average value of a period of 24 h is not higher than +35 C. For ambient temperatures, whose average value deviates from this ambient temperature, the following correction factors must be observed.
1,15
I201_18294
1,1
1,05
1 K2 0,95 1 0,9 2 0,85 0,8 15 20 25 30 35 Ambient temperature [C] 1 Main busbars 2 Vertical distribution busbars 40 45 50 55
In= In <= 2000 m k1 Correction factors for devices At ambient temperatures of >40 C, the rated operating current has to be derated for devices. The ambient temperature of the devices complies with the internal temperature of the low-voltage power distribution boards at the installation site. For the correction factors, refer to the technical documents of the devices.
12
Siemens LV 56 2011
12/7
Siemens AG 2012

Internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards
Overview
Determination of the internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards With a calculation in accordance with IEC 60890, the internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards can be approximately specified on the basis of the total power loss and the system structure.
Pv [W/m] Distribution busbar systems 600 500 9 400 12 300 200 100 0 0 Main busbar systems 1000 800 Pv [W/m] 2 600 3 400 200 0 1 3 9
I201_18295 I201_18296
10 11
1. Power loss of busbar systems per section For the determination of the power loss of main busbars and distribution busbar systems, the operating current I [A] on the respective length [m] has to be specified. The power loss assigned to the respective busbar configuration is illustrated in the following diagram.
200
400
600 [A]
800
1000
1200
1400
Profiled busbar 30x30 mm
10 Profiled busbar 40x30 mm 11 2x(30x10) mm2 12 2x(40x10) mm2
PV main busbar system= PV [W/m] Length [m] PV distribution busbar system= PV [W/m] Length [m] PV busbar system/section = PV main busbar system + PV distribution busbar system
500
1000 [A]
1500
2000
2500
1 2
2 x (20 x 10) mm2 2 x (30 x 10) mm2 4 x (20 x 10) mm2 4 x (30 x 10) mm2
2. Power loss of devices per section For the power loss, refer to the technical documents of the devices. In this context, the actual utilisation (operating current, temporal simultaneousness, rated load factor) has to be observed. For terminal bars, cables and lines as well as for small devices, a percentage increase of 10% has to be considered.
Ir = operating current In= rated current
7
12
3 3
1200 1000 800 Pv [W/m] 600 400 200 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 [A] 2500 3000 3500 4000
P Vn device= power loss device at rated current PV device= PV device (Ir / In)2 PV device / section= total (PV device) 1.1
6 8 5
5 6 7 8
4 x (40 x 10) mm2 4 x (50 x 10) mm2 2 x 4 x (20 x 10) mm2 2 x 4 x (30 x 10) mm2
12/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

3. Installed power loss per section The installed power loss per section is the sum of the power loss of busbar systems and devices. PV section= PV busbar system / section + PV device/section 4. Determination of the sections internal temperature The diagram below illustrates the correlation between the installed power loss and the temperature difference, based on the calculation procedure of IEC 60890 as well as the specific data of SIVACON S4. The diagram refers to a section in degree of protection IP55 which is installed side-by-side with a free roof and rear panel. In case of deviating conditions, the correction factors of the following table have to be considered. Alternatively the permissible power loss as a function of section dimensions and overtemperatures can be taken from the tables on the next page. The corresponding correction factors must also be applied in these cases.
Correction factors Ventilated section, degree of protection IP4X Section with free side panel Roof not free Rear panel not free k3 k4 k5 k6 1.65 1.09 0.95 0.92
PV =
PV section k3 k4 k5 k6
40,0 35,0
I201_18297
1 30,0 25,0 6 dT [K] 8 20,0 15,0 10,0 5,0 0,0 0 100 200 Pv [W] Height x Width x Depth [mm] of the section 1 2000 x 400 x 600 5 2000 x 600 x 800 300 400 500 2 5 3 4 7
2 2000 x 400 x 800 3 2000 x 600 x 400 4 2000 x 600 x 600
6 2000 x 800 x 400 7 2000 x 800 x 600 8 2000 x 800 x 800
12
The determined temperature difference refers to the average height in the section. The temperature linearly increases from the average section height to the complete section height with sufficient accuracy and has to be specified for SIVACON S4 with a correction factor of 1.4. Internal temperature in average section height [C] = Ambient temperature of power distribution board [C] + temperature difference T [K] Internal temperature in complete section height [C] = Ambient temperature of power distribution board [C] + temperature difference T [K] 1.4
Siemens LV 56 2011
12/9
Siemens AG 2012

The table values for permissible power losses refer to an average height in the section for sections in the middle of a board, with a free roof plate and a free rear panel. In the case of deviating conditions of installation, the following correction factors must be applied. The temperature linearly increases from the average section height to the complete section height with sufficient accuracy and has to be specified for SIVACON S4 with a correction factor of 1.4. Internal temperature in average section height [C] = Ambient temperature of power distribution board [C] + temperature difference T [K] Internal temperature in complete section height [C] = Ambient temperature of power distribution board [C] + temperature difference T [K] 1.4
Correction factors Section with free side panel Roof not free Rear panel not free k4 k5 k6 1.09 0.95 0.92
PV section = PV k4 k5 k6
Permissible power losses in W for empty sections at overtemperature in half the section height
Depth Width Roof plate free, rear panel free Section unventilated in middle position mm 400 mm 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200 600 350 400 600 10K 75 85 122 150 155 170 190 99 111 143 165 171 188 208 120 129 157 182 187 202 227 15K 124 141 202 250 257 283 315 163 183 236 273 282 311 344 199 214 260 301 310 334 377 20K 177 202 289 357 367 403 450 233 262 338 390 404 445 492 285 306 372 431 444 478 539 25K 234 266 381 470 485 531 595 308 346 446 515 533 587 649 376 404 492 568 586 631 711 30K 293 334 478 590 608 667 745 386 434 559 647 669 736 814 472 507 617 713 735 792 892 35K 355 405 580 716 736 808 903 468 525 677 783 810 892 986 572 614 747 864 890 959 1081 Section ventilated in middle position 10K 124 140 201 248 256 281 314 163 183 236 272 282 310 343 198 213 259 300 309 333 375 15K 205 233 333 413 424 467 520 269 302 389 450 465 513 568 328 353 429 497 512 551 622 20K 292 333 477 589 606 665 743 384 432 558 644 667 734 812 470 505 614 711 733 789 889 25K 386 439 629 776 800 876 982 508 571 736 850 879 969 1071 620 667 812 937 967 1041 1173 30K 483 551 789 974 1003 1101 1229 637 716 922 1068 1104 1214 1343 779 837 1018 1176 1213 1307 1472 35K 586 668 957 1181 1214 1333 1490 772 866 1117 1292 1337 1472 1627 944 1013 1233 1426 1469 1582 1784
12
800
800 850 1000 1200 350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200
12/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012

Example
Overview
Example for a power distribution board configuration test Power distribution board data
Rated operating voltage Ue Rated short-time current Icw Rated load factor Degree of protection Ambient temperature Section height Base height Section depth Cable connection infeed Cable connection outputs 400 V / 50 Hz 35 kA 0.8 IP40 35 C 2000 mm 100 mm 600 mm from the top rear bottom (rear panel free) Sec- Output tion 2 250 400 630 200 320 504 51.20 108.80 162.56 80 170 254 Sec- Infeed tion 1 Output
Determination of devices' power loss per section

Rated current In A 1424 250 Rated current In 0.8 A -200 PV device PV device max Location
W 495.06 51.20
W 825 80 01.D1 01.J1 01.K1 02.D1 02.F1 02.K2
Front view
Section 1 H2000xW800xD600 2200 2000 1800 C 1600 D 1400 1200 1000 800 600 K 400 L 200 M 0
I201_18293
PV device section 1=597.46 W 1.1=657.21 W PV device section 2=322.56 W 1.1=354.82 W
Section 2 H2000xW600xD600
Determination of the power loss per section PV section 1= (PV busbar system section 1 + PV device section 1) 1.1=743.81 W PV section 2= (PV busbar system section 2 + PV device section 2) 1.1=354.82 W
A B
1424A
2 x (40 x 10)mm
01.D1 3VL, 250A, 3-pole 02.D1
Determination of the internal temperature

Factors section 1 k3 1.65 k4 1.09 k5 0.85
02.F1
200A; 0,45m
E F
3WL, 1600A, 3-pole
k6 1 Factors section 2 k3 1.65 k4 1.09 k5 1 k6 1 PV section 1 PV section 2 Internal temperature in accordance with diagram 486.56 W 197.29 W page 12/9 22 K 12 K 57 C 47 C 66 C 52 C
520A; 0,2m
G H J
3VL, 400A, 3-pole
12
01.J1
3VL, 250A, 3-pole 704A; 0,25m 02.K1 3VL, 630A, 3-pole
904A; 0,3m
01.K1
Temperature difference in half section height section 1 Temperature difference in half section height section 2 Internal temperature in half section height section 1 Internal temperature in half section height section 2 Internal temperature in section height for section 1 Internal temperature in section height for section 2
3VL, 250A, 3-pole
Determination of the power loss of the busbar systems per section

Rated current Length In 0.8 A Section 200 1 520 904 704 m 0.45 0.2 0.3 0.25 PV busbar system W/m 8 50 160 100 PV busbar system W 3.6 10 48 25
Configuration test According to the technical documents of the devices, the limit temperatures are not exceeded. The devices are able to carry the specified rated currents.
PV busbar system section 1=86.6 W
Siemens LV 56 2011
12/11
Siemens AG 2012

Notes
12
12/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
13/2 13/7 13/8 13/10 13/11 13/16 13/17 13/18 13/19
13
Glossary Catalogue notes Order information Further documentation Standards and approvals Siemens contacts Online services Service & Support Comprehensive support from A to Z Software licenses Subject index Order number index including export markings Conditions of sale and delivery 13/20 13/21 13/24 13/29
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Glossary
Overview
The terms defined below are used in the present catalogue in accordance with IEC 61439-1 and EN 61439-1. Compartment IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.2.9 Section or section panel which is encased with the exception of openings required for connection, control or ventilation. Cubicle IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.4.1 Component of a switchgear and controlgear assembly which serves the accommodation of various components of a switchgear and controlgear assembly or of an enclosure. Functional unit IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.1.8 Part of a switchgear and controlgear assembly with all electrical and mechanical components which contribute to the execution of the same function. Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.1.1 Assembly of one or more switching devices combined with corresponding operating equipment for control, measuring and signalling tasks and with protective and control devices, etc. The individual devices are completely assembled by the manufacturer, including all internal electrical and mechanical connections and construction components. Rated conditional short-circuit current (Icc) IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.8.9.4 The rated conditional short-circuit current corresponds to the uninfluenced short-circuit current which a circuit of the switchgear and controlgear assembly, that is protected by short-circuit protective devices, may carry without damage (for a limited time). The rated conditional short-circuit current is therefore stated for outgoing and/or incoming feeders, e.g. with circuit breakers. Rated diversity factor (RDF) IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.8.10 The rated diversity factor of a switchgear and controlgear assembly or of a component of a switchgear and controlgear assembly (e.g. section, section panel) which comprises several main circuits is the ratio of the largest sum of all currents which are to be expected in the respective main circuits at any given time to the sum of the rated currents of all main circuits of the switchgear and controlgear assembly or of the affected part of the switchgear and controlgear assembly. If the manufacturer states a rated diversity factor, this value must be taken as a basis for the temperature-rise test. Rated frequency IEC/EN 60947-2; 4.3.3 Frequency for which switching devices are dimensioned and to which the other characteristic data refer. See also "Rated operating voltage"; "rated continuous current" Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.3 Parameter for the resistance of clearances inside switching devices to impulse overvoltages. The application of suitable switching devices prevents disconnected system parts from transmitting overvoltages from the network in which they are applied. Rated insulation voltage (Ui) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.2 Voltage to which the insulation tests and creepage distances refer. The maximum rated operating voltage must, in no case, exceed the rated insulation voltage. See also "Rated operating voltage" Rated making capacity IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.5.2 Current which can be switched on by switching devices with the respective rated operating voltage in accordance with the utilisation category. See also "Rated operating voltage" Rated operating capacity IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3 Capacity which can be switched by switching devices with the assigned rated operating voltage in accordance with the utilisation category, e.g. power contactor of utilisation category AC-3: 37 kW at 400 V. Rated operating current (Ie) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3 Current which can be carried by switching devices in consideration of the rated operating voltage, the operating time, the utilisation category and the ambient temperature. See also "Rated operating voltage" Rated operating voltage (Ue) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1 Voltage to which the characteristic values of switching devices are referred. The maximum rated operating voltage must, in no case, exceed the rated insulation voltage. See also "Rated insulation voltage"
13
Rated continuous current (Iu) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.4 Current which can be carried by switching devices in continuous operation (for weeks, months or years). Rated control voltage (Uc) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.5.1 Voltage applied to the actuating NO contact of a control circuit. It may deviate from the rated control supply voltage if transformers or resistors are connected to the control circuit. Rated current (In) (of circuit breakers) IEC/EN 60947-2; 4.3.2.3 Current which, for circuit breakers, corresponds to the rated continuous current and the conventional thermal current. See also "Rated continuous current"
13/2
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Glossary
Rated peak withstand current (Ipk) IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.8.9.2 As peak value of the peak current, the rated peak withstand current characterises the dynamic strength of switchgear and controlgear assembly circuits. The rated peak withstand current is stated for the distribution and/or main busbars of switchgear and controlgear assemblies. Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) IEC/EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.2.2 The short-circuit current depending on the rated operating voltage which can be repeatedly interrupted by a circuit breaker (test O CO CO). After the short-circuit breaking, the circuit breaker is able to continue to carry the rated current in the case of increased self-heating and to trip in case of overload. See also "Rated continuous current" See also "Rated operating voltage" Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (Icn) IEC/EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.3 Maximum current which can be switched off by switching devices with the rated operating voltage and frequency without causing damage. The value is stated as effective value. See also "Rated operating voltage" Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm IEC / EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.2 Maximum current which can be switched on by switching devices with a certain rated operating voltage and frequency without causing damage. Deviating from the other characteristic data, the value is stated as peak value. See also "Rated operating voltage" Rated short-time withstand current (Icw) IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.8.9.3 As the effective short-circuit current value, the rated short-time withstand current characterises the thermal strength of switchgear and controlgear assembly circuits during a short-time load. The rated short-time withstand current is normally determined for the duration of 1 sec; deviating time values must be indicated. The rated short-time withstand current is stated for the distribution and/or main busbars of switchgear and controlgear assemblies. Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu) IEC/EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.2.1 Maximum short-circuit current which can be interrupted by a circuit breaker (test O CO). After a short-circuit switch-off, the circuit breaker is able to trip with increased tolerances in the case of overload. Rated values In accordance with IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.8.3, the manufacturers of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies state rated values. These rated values apply to the specified operating conditions and characterise the usability of switchgear and controlgear assemblies. The coordination of the operating equipment or the configuration of the switchgear and controlgear assemblies must be based on these rated values. Section IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.2.7 Component of a switchgear and controlgear assembly positioned between two successive vertical limiting levels. Section panel IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.2.8 Component of a switchgear and controlgear assembly positioned between two superimposed horizontal limiting levels inside a section. Transport unit IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.2.10 Part of a switchgear and controlgear assembly or complete switchgear and controlgear assembly which is not disassembled for transportation. Type-tested low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly IEC/EN 61439-1; 3.9.1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly which complies with the original type or system of the switchgear and controlgear assembly type-tested in accordance with this standard without significant deviations.
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/3
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Glossary
Ambient conditions / Degrees of protection The climate and external ambient conditions (natural impurities, toxic chemically active substances, small animals) may have severe repercussions on the functionality of electrical systems. The effect depends on the climatic protection of the room in which the system is installed. In the presence of high concentrations of toxic substances it is advisable to adopt appropriate measures to reduce them, for example:
Ambient conditions Climatic Class 3K4 (defined according to IEC 60721-3-3) Minimum temperature of the air Maximum temperature of the air Minimum relative humidity of the air Maximum relative humidity of the air Minimum absolute humidity of the air Maximum absolute humidity of the air Temperature variation rate Minimum air pressure Maximum air pressure Solar radiation Thermal radiation Movement of the air Condensate formation 5 C 1) + 40 C + 35 C (24h average) 2) 5% 95 % 1 g/m_ 29 g/m_ 0.5C min. 70 kPA 106 kPA 700 W/m2 -1.0 m/s Possible -----------Provide heating, if frequent approx. 1 per day for 2 hours ----
Intake of air from an area with a lower pollution level Exposing the area to a mild overpressure (e.g. introducing non polluted air into the system) Climate control of the room where the system is installed (reducing the temperature, relative humidity of the air < 60%, possible installation of a purifying filter) Attenuation of overheating (overdimensioning of electrical equipment and components such as main busbars and distribution busbars)
Measures
Classification of ambient conditions with the relative limit values
Matter deposited by the wind Water (other than rain) Ice accumulation Other ambient climatic conditions 3Z1 3Z7 3Z9 3Z10 Biological 3B2 Thermal radiation is negligible Water drops as defined in standard IEC 60068-2-18 Water spray as defined in standard IEC 60068-2-18 Water jets as defined in standard IEC 60068-2-18 Flora Fauna
No See other ambient climatic conditions No
IPX1 IPX4 IPX5 Mould formation Presence of rodents and other harmful animals, other than termites Salt mist 2 mg/dm2 average value 5.0 mg/m3 3.0 mg/m3 0.3 mg/m3 1.0 mg/m3 0.1 mg/m3 10.0 mg/m3 0.1 mg/m3 3.0 mg/m3 -0.01 mg/m3 0.4 mg/(m2 h) 300 mg/m3 0.4 mg/m3 15 mg/(m2 h) IP5X (2 ppm) (2 ppm) (0.1 ppm) (0.7 ppm) (0.06 ppm) (14.3 ppm) (0.05 ppm) (1.66 ppm) < IP5X IP4X, including protection for technical floors
13
Chemically active substances
3C3
Marine salt Sulphurous anhydride SO2 Hydrogen sulphide H2S Chlorine Cl2 Hydrogen chloride HCl Hydrofluoric acid HF Ammonia NH3 Ozone O3 Nitrogen oxide NOx
Mechanically active substances
3S1
Sand in the air Dust (matter in suspension) Dust (matter deposited)
3S3
Sand in the air Dust (matter in suspension) Dust (matter deposited)
1) 2)
According to standard IEC 60721-3-3 the minimum admissible air temperature is + 5 C Higher values can be admitted on request (see dimensioning tables)
13/4
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Glossary
Network systems Distribution systems (network types) in acc. with IEC 60364-3 (DIN VDE 0100-300) Determination of the protective measures and selection of the electrical operating equipment according to the distribution system. TN systems - TN-S system The neutral conductor and protective conductor function are consistently separated in this system. Other systems - TT system In the TT system, one point is directly earthed; the elements of the electrical system are connected to earth electrodes which are separated from the signal earth. The TT system corresponds to the system in which today the protective measures protective earthing, RCCB and fault-voltage circuit breaker are applied.
L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 N PE 1 PE L3 N
NSV0_01081
NSV0_01078
- IT system The IT system features no direct connection between active conductors and earthed parts; the elements of the electrical system are earthed. The IT system corresponds to the system in which today the protective conductor system protective measure is applied.
- TN-C system The neutral conductor and protective conductor function are composite throughout the entire system.
L1 L2 L3
NSV0_01082
L1 L2 L3 PEN
2 PE 1
Explanations
1
NSV0_01079
13
$ %
Body Impedance
- TN-C-S system Combination of the neutral and the protective conductor function. In one part of the system they are composite in one conductor, while in another part they are separated.
L1 L2 L3 PEN PE N
- First letter = Earthing condition of the supplying current source T = Direct earthing of one point I = Either insulation of all active parts of the earth or connection of one point to the earth via impedance - Second letter = Earthing condition of the elements of the electrical system T = Elements are directly earthed, irrespective of a possible earthing of one point of the current supply N = Elements are directly connected to the signal earth; in AC current networks, the earthed point is generally the star point - Further letters = Arrangement of the neutral and the protective conductor S = Neutral and protective conductor function by means of separated conductors C = Neutral and protective conductor function combined in one conductor (PEN)
NSV0_01080
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/5
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Glossary
Operating and maintenance aisles (in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 Part 729)
1 2000
500 700 700 700
600 700
1 Minimum passage height beneath covers or enclosures.
Reduced aisle widths in the area of open doors
Minimum passage width 700 / 600 mm
Escape direction
Free minimum passage 500 mm
13
1 With opposing switchboard fronts, constriction by open doors (i.e. doors which do not close in the escape direction) is only accounted for on one side 2 Door width dimensions must be complied with, i.e. a minimum door opening angle of 90 is required.
I201_18385
13/6
Siemens LV 56 2011
I201_18384
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Catalogue notes
Overview
Registered trademarks All product designations may be registered trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. Third parties using these trademarks or product names for their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. Amendments Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given these are subject to change without prior notice. Dimensions All dimensions are in mm. Illustrations Illustrations are not binding. Technical specifications The technical specifications in the catalogue are for general information. The instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the products must be observed during assembly, operation and maintenance. Further technical information is available at www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support under Product List: - Technical specifications under Entry List: - Updates - Downloads - FAQ - Manuals - Characteristic curves - Certificates Configurators can be found under www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/configurators Assembly, operation and maintenance The instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the products must be observed during assembly, operation and maintenance.
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/7
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order information
Logistics
General Our logistics service offers quality from the order to the delivery pertaining to delivery service, communication and environmental protection. To maintain this high quality, we focus on the optimisation of the logistical procedures on the basis of a customised infrastructure and automatic DP order processing. We attach major importance to personal support, deliveries in due time and area-wide transportation. The DIN-ISO-9001 certification and a consistent quality management are vital issues for us. The automatic DP order processing is fast, cost-effective and fail-safe. If you would like to exploit these benefits, please do not hesitate to contact us. Packaging, packing units Our device and shipping packagings offer protection against dust and mechanical damage during transport, thus ensuring that the customer receives the devices in a flawless condition. When selecting and designing our packagings, we set great value upon environmental compatibility, re-usability (e.g. crumpled paper instead of styrofoam chips as transport protection in shipping packages up to 32 kg) and above all, upon waste prevention. Unless otherwise stated in the selection and ordering data of this catalogue, our devices are supplied in separate individual packages. For small parts/accessories, we offer you economical packaging units as standard packs containing more than one item, e.g. 5, 10, 50 or 100 units. It is essential that whole number multiples of these quantities be ordered to ensure satisfactory quality of the products and problem-free order processing. The device order numbers can be easily identified by means of the EAN bar code, which simplifies both order and warehouse logistics. The low-voltage controls and distribution master data include the allocation of order numbers and EAN code for data processing.
13
13/8
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order information
Overview
Small orders When small orders are placed, the costs associated with order processing are greater than the order value. We recommend therefore that you combine several small orders. Where this is not possible, we unfortunately find it necessary to charge a processing supplement of 20.-- to cover our costs for order processing and invoicing for all orders with a net goods value of less than 250.--. Explanations on the selection and ordering data
PS/P. unit (packaging size/packaging unit)
The packaging size/packaging unit defines, e.g. in units, sets or metres, the smallest quantity which can be ordered. Examples: PS/P. unit 1 unit 20 units 1 set Meaning One delivery unit realises a function. All the parts required for installation form part of the delivery unit. The price refers to one delivery unit. One delivery unit = The order number includes 20 identical products. The price refers to one delivery unit. A set is made up of a defined collection of different parts.
Orders for special designs For ordering products that differ from the versions listed in the catalogue, the order number specified in the catalogue must be supplemented with "Z" ; the required features must be specified by means of the alphanumeric order codes or in plain text.
Examples

Copper connecting kit for 3NP1 disconnectors for connection to cables 8PQ6 000-5BA72 1 unit
Door and special covers

1/4 turn screw for cover, 2 parts, up to 09/11 8PQ9 400-0BA17 20 units
8PQ6 000-5BA72 PS/P. unit: 1 = The price refers to one assembly kit with all necessary parts such as copper busbars, covers, supports and fasteners. The scope of delivery is one assembly kit per ordered MLFB.
8PQ9 400-0BA17: PS/P. unit: 20 = The price refers to 20 1/4-turn screws per MLFB. The scope of delivery is 20 1/4-turn screws per ordered MLFB.
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/9
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Further documentation
Overview
We regard product support as just as important as the products and systems themselves. Visit our site on the Internet for a comprehensive offering of support for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products, such as Operating instructions and manuals for direct download Online registration for seminars and events Up-to-date answers to your queries and problems Software upgrades and updates for fast download Telephone assistance in more than 190 countries Photos and graphics for external use and much more - all conveniently and easily accessible. Address: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage You will find regularly updated information material such as catalogues, customer magazines, brochures and trial versions of software for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial Here, you can order your copy of the available documentation or download it in common file formats (PDF, ZIP).
For your configuration systems we can provide technical and graphic data in electronic form for the range of low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products:
13
CAx online generator For the further processing of low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products in CAE/CAD systems the online generator provides: Technical product master data in CSV and Excel format Graphic product data - 2D dimensional drawings in DXF format (other formats optional) - 3D models in STEP format - Internal circuit diagrams - EPLAN electric P 8 macros Documentation in the form of PDF files - Product data sheets - Manuals - Operating instructions - Characteristic curves - Certificates Product photos Texts for tenders in GAEB and Text format. www.siemens.com/cax
13/10
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Standards and approvals
Overview
Approvals, test certificates, characteristic curves An overview of the certificates available for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products along with more technical documentation can be consulted daily on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Product support: Approvals / certificates
Product support: Characteristic curves
Product standards (excerpt)

IEC 60947-1 60947-2 60947-3 60947-4-1 60947-4-2 60947-4-3 60947-5-1 60947-5-2 60947-5-3 60947-5-5 60947-5-6 60947-5-7 60947-5-8 60947-5-9 60947-6-1 60947-6-2 60947-7-1 60947-7-2 60947-7-3 60947-8 62026-2 60269-1 60269-4 60050-441 60439-1 60439-3 61439-1 61439-2 -61140 60664-1 DIN EN 60947-1 60947-2 60947-3 60947-4-1 60947-4-2 60947-4-3 60947-5-1 60947-5-2 60947-5-3 60947-5-5 60947-5-6 60947-5-7 60947-5-8 60947-5-9 60947-6-1 60947-6-2 60947-7-1 60947-7-2 60947-7-3 60947-8 50295 60269-1 60269-4 -60439-1 60439-3 61439-1 61439-2 50274 61140 60664-1 DIN VDE --------------------------Title Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear: General rules Circuit breakers Load-break switches, disconnectors, switch disconnectors and fuse-combination units Contactors and motor-starters: Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters Contactors and motor-starters: AC semiconductor motor controllers and starters AC semiconductor motor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices Control circuit devices and switching elements - Proximity switches Requirements for proximity devices with defined behaviour under fault conditions Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function Control circuit devices and switching elements - DC interface for proximity sensors and switching amplifiers (NAMUR) Requirements for proximity devices with analogue output Three-position enabling switches Flow rate switches Multiple function equipment - Transfer switching equipment Multiple function equipment - Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS) Ancillary equipment: Terminal blocks for copper conductors Ancillary equipment: Protective conductor terminal blocks for copper conductors Ancillary equipment: Safety requirements for fuse terminal blocks Control units for built-in thermal protection (PTC) for rotating electrical machines Actuator Sensor interface (AS-i) Low-voltage fuses: General requirements Low-voltage fuses: Supplementary requirements for fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor devices International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Switchgear, controlgear and fuses
13
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Particular requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use; Distribution boards 0660-600-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - General rules 0660-600-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies -Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Protection against electric shock Protection against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts -Protection from electric shock - Common aspects for installation and equipment -Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems Principles, requirements and tests
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/11
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
IEC 60204-1 -60079-14 60079-2 61810-1 61812-1 60999-1 DIN EN 60204-1 50178 60079-14 60079-2 61810-1 61812-1 60999-1 DIN VDE -------0570-11) 0570-2-11) 0570-2-21) 0570-2-41) 0570-2-61) 0570-2-91) 0570-2-121) 0570-2-131) 0570-2-151) 0570-2-201) 0570-101) -0552 ----Title Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines: General requirements Electronic equipment for use in power installations Explosive atmospheres - Electrical installations design, selection and erection Installing electrical apparatus in potentially explosive gas atmospheres (except mining) Explosive Atmospheres - Part 2: Equipment protection by pressurized enclosure "p" Electromechanical elementary relays - Part 1: General requirements Time relays for industrial and residential use - Part 1: Requirements and tests Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors; Safety requirements for screw-type and screwlesstype clamping units - Part 1: General requirements and particular requirements for clamping units for conductors 0.2 mm2 up to 35 mm2 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products - Part 1: General requirements and tests -Part 2-1: Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies incorporating separating transformers for general applications -Part 2-2: Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies incorporating control transformers -Part 2-4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers -Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating safety isolating transformers -Part 2-9: Particular requirements and tests for transformers and power supply units for class III handlamps for tungsten filament lamps -Part 2-12: Particular requirements and tests for constant voltage transformers and power supply units for constant voltage -Part 2-13: Particular requirements and tests for auto transformers and power supply units incorporating auto transformers -Part 2-15: Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers for the supply of medical locations -Part 2-20: Particular requirements for small reactors Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and combinations thereof - EMC requirements Power transformers - Part 11: Dry-type transformers Specifications for variable-ratio transformers having current collectors which are moved transversely in the direction of the windings Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-1: Testing and measuring techniques - Overview of IEC 61000-4 series Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-3: Generic standards - Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial environments Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current transformers
61558-1 61558-2-1 61558-2-2 61558-2-4 61558-2-6 61558-2-9 61558-2-12 61558-2-13 61558-2-15 61558-2-20 62041 60076-11 -61000-4-1 61000-6-3 61000-6-4 60044-1
1)
61558-1 61558-2-1 61558-2-2 61558-2-4 61558-2-6 61558-2-9 61558-2-12 61558-2-13 61558-2-15 61558-2-20 62041 60076-11 -61000-4-1 61000-6-3 61000-6-4 60044-1
VDE classification. CSA C22.2 ASME -------------------------JIS ----------------Title Specialty transformers Industrial control equipment Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures Power units other than CLASS 2 Dry-type general purpose and power transformers Low-voltage transformers Medical electrical equipment, Part 1: General requirements for safety (IEC 60601, EN 60601, VDE 0750-1) Electrical equipment for use in class I and class II, division 2, and class III hazardous (classified) locations Terminal blocks Wire connectors Equipment wiring terminals for use with aluminum and/or copper conductors Enclosures for electrical equipment. Non-environmental considerations Specialty transformers Industrial control equipment Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures General use power supplies Elevator and escalator electrical equipment
UL 506 508 489 1012
13
1561 5085 60601-1 1604
1059 -486A-486B -486E 50 --------No. 66 No. 14 No. 5 No. 107-1 ---
A17.5 / B 44.1 --
C 8201-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 4: Contactors and motor-starters
13/12
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Quality management
The quality management system of our IC LMV LV Business Unit complies with the international standard DIN EN ISO 9001. The products and systems described in this catalogue are sold under application of a VDE-approved quality management system according to ISO 9001. VDE certificate Siemens AG Infrastructure & Cities Sector Low and Medium Voltage Division Low Voltage Distribution (IC LMV LV) Reg. No.: 40017/QM/03.06
Certificates
Information on the certificates available (CE, UL, CSA, FM, shipping authorisations) for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products can be found on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support In the Entry List you can use the certificate type (general product approval, explosion protection, test certificates, shipbuilding,...) as a filter criterion.
Approval requirements valid in different countries

Siemens low-voltage switchgear and controlgear are designed, manufactured and tested according to the relevant German standards (DIN and VDE), IEC publications and European standards (EN) as well as CSA and UL standards. The standards assigned to the single devices are stated in the relevant parts of this catalogue. As far as is economically viable, the requirements of the various regulations valid in other countries are also taken into account in the design of the equipment. In some countries (see table below), an approval is required for certain low-voltage switchgear and controlgear components. Depending on the market requirements, these components have been submitted for approval to the authorised testing institutes. In some cases, CSA for Canada and UL for the USA only approve special switchgear designs. Such special versions are listed separately from the standard versions in the individual parts of this catalogue. For this equipment, partial limitations of the maximum permissible voltages, currents and ratings can be imposed, or special approval and, in some cases, special identification is required. For use on board ship, the specifications of the marine classification societies must be observed (see table below). In some cases, they require type tests of the components to be approved.
13
Testing bodies, approval identification and approval requirements

Canada 1) Government-appointed or private, officially recognised testing bodies Approval symbol CSA UL (USA) USA 1) UL China CQC
s
+
c u cU c UUS cuUS
u
+
U c UUS cuUS +
Approval requirements Remarks
UL and CSA are authorised to grant approvals according to Canadian CCC or US regulations. Attention: these approvals are frequently not recognised and additional approval often has to be obtained from the national testing authority.
For more information about UL and CSA see Page 13/14.

1)
For guide numbers and file numbers for the approvals, visit our website at
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/13
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Marine classification societies

Germany Name United Kingdom France Bureau Veritas Norway Det Norske Veritas CIS Russian Maritime Register of Shipping RMRS Italy Registro Italiano Navale RINA Poland Polski Rejestre Statkw PRS USA American Bureau of Shipping ABS GermaLloyds nischer Lloyd Register of Shipping GL LRS
Codes
BV
DNV
CE mark of conformity
Manufacturers of products which fall within the subject area to which EC directives apply must identify their products, instruction manuals or packaging with a CE mark of conformity. The CE mark of conformity confirms that a product fulfills the appropriate basic requirements of all pertinent directives. The mark of conformity is a mandatory requirement for putting products into circulation throughout the EC. All the products in this catalogue are in conformance with the EC directives and bear the CE mark of conformity. Low-voltage directive EMC directive The manufacturer of the system assembled from individual modules is responsible for the preparation of the EC declaration of conformity.
Accident prevention
Test certificates and approvals from the BIA (German statutory industrial accident insurance institution in Bonn), from SUVA (Swiss institute for accident prevention), BGFE (Berufsgenossenschaft der Feinmechanik und Elektrotechnik) and VDE are available for some devices in safety control systems. For details, see the respective product descriptions.
Special standards, for example the USA and Canada

In the USA and Canada, for machine tools and processing machines in particular, supply lines are laid using rubber insulated cable enclosed in heavy-duty steel piping similar to that used for gas or water pipe systems. The tubing system must be completely watertight and electrically conductive (especially sleeving and elbows). Since the tubing system can also be earthed, the cable entries of enclosed units equipped with heavy-gauge or metric threads must be fitted with metal adapters between these threads and the tube thread. The necessary adapters are specified for the switchgear as accessories; they should be ordered separately unless otherwise specified. Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for auxiliary circuits (e.g. contactor relays, commanding and signalling devices and auxiliary switches/auxiliary contacts in general) are generally only approved by CSA and UL for "Heavy Duty" or "Standard Duty" and are identified either with these specifications in addition to the maximum permissible voltage or by using an abbreviation. Different features of UL approvals (for USA and Canada)
Recognised Component Devices are identified on the rating plate using the "UL recognition mark": USA: U, cUUS Canada: cU, cUUS Devices are approved as modules for "factory wiring", i.e.: as devices for installation in control systems, which are selected, installed, wired and tested entirely by trained personnel in factories, workshops or elsewhere, according to the operating conditions. Listed Product Devices are identified using the "UL listing mark" on the rating plate e.g. USA: u LISTED 165 C Canada: cu LISTED 165 C IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ. (165 C stands for: Siemens, I IA CD Division, Amberg plant) Devices are approved for "field wiring", i.e.: As devices for installation in control systems, which are completely wired by trained personnel in factories, workshops or elsewhere. As single devices for sale in retail outlets in the USA/Canada.
The abbreviations are harmonised with IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix 1 Table A.1 and correspond to the stated utilisation categories. For various switching devices detailed in the catalogue, a note has been included to the effect that, above a certain voltage, the auxiliary switches/auxiliary contacts can only be used if they have the same polarity. This means that the input terminals can only be connected to the same pole of the actuating voltage, e.g. "600 V AC above 300 V AC same polarity".
13
If devices are u or cu approved as "listed products", they are also approved as U or cU "recognised components".
For more information about UL and CSA see Page 13/13.
13/14
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Special standards in different countries

Argentina In Argentina the approval requirements are based on Resolution 92/98. Since 01.04.2001 circuit breakers and RCCBs require approval. Since April 1st, 2002, protective switches up to In = 63 A and Umax = 440V require approval and must bear a mark of conformity. GOST approval for Russia Since August 1, 2003, CCC approval is required for many products that are marketed in China. Romania In Romania, components which are used in public buildings must be approved by the Romanian testing authority ICECON. South Africa In South Africa there are approval requirements for circuit breakers and busbar trunking systems. Such equipment must bear a conformity mark. CCC approval
A GOST approval is required for all products that are to be sold in Russia. The GOST mark has been obligatory on the packaging of all devices since mid-1998. All devices delivered to any part of the Russian Federation must have this customs certification. C-Tick licensing for Australia
The C-Tick license is required for marketing Siemens components in Australia. Electronic devices must provide proof of EMC clearance in Australia, similar to the CE mark of conformity laid down by the EMC directive applicable in the EC and bear the "C-Tick" mark. These requirements have been in force since October 1st, 1999.
More information
You can find more information about standards and approvals at www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/15
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Siemens contacts
Contact partners at Siemens Industry

At Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies, more than 85 000 people are resolutely pursuing the same goal: long-term improvement of your competitive ability. We are committed to this goal. Thanks to our commitment, we continue to set new standards in automation and drive technology. In all industries worldwide. At your service locally, around the globe for consulting, sales, training, service, support, spare parts ... on the entire Industry Automation and Drive Technologies range. Your personal contact can be found in our Contacts database at: www.siemens.com/automation/partner You start by selecting a Product group, Country, City, Service.
13
13/16
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Online Services
Information and ordering in the internet and on DVD
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology on the WWW

Siemens low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation technology offers switchboards, busbar trunking systems, distribution boards as well as protection, switching, measuring and monitoring devices, building management systems, switches and socket outlets. The consistency, modularity and intelligence of our components and systems offer you numerous advantages throughout their service life and wherever you are in the world. We deliver trendsetting designs and innovative functions in unique quality, developed in accordance with the applicable international standards. Comprehensive information about all products and systems as well as service and support is available in a compact and clear format on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
Product selection using the interactive catalogue CA 01 of Industry

Detailed information together with convenient interactive functions: The interactive catalogue CA 01 covers more than 80 000 products and thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies product base. Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives. All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to work with and intuitive. After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the press of a button, by fax or by online link. Information on the interactive catalogue CA 01 can be found in the Internet under www.siemens.com/automation/ca01 or on DVD.
13
Easy Shopping with the Industry Mall

The Industry Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG in the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of products presented in electronic catalogues in an informative and attractive way. Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure from selection through ordering to tracking of the order to be carried out online via the Internet. Numerous functions are available to support you. For example, powerful search functions make it easy to find the required products, which can be immediately checked for availability. Customer-specific discounts and preparation of quotes can be carried out online as well as order tracking and tracing. Please visit the Industry Mall on the Internet under: www.siemens.com/industrymall
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/17
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Service & Support
The unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle
Technical Consulting Training
t pp or e Su Onlin
Tec Sup hnical por t

Pa r ts
Our Service & Support are available worldwide to help you with every aspect of Siemens Building and Automation Technologies. We offer on-site support for every phase of the life cycle of your buildings and plants in more than 100 countries.
Engineering Support
Modernization Services
Optimization Services
Online support
Our comprehensive online information platform covers every aspect of our Service & Support and is available whenever, wherever. www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ support
Sp ar e
Service Programs
Every step of the way, you have access to an experienced team of specialists and their combined expertise. Thanks to regular training and the close cooperation of key employees around the globe, we are able to offer reliable services for a huge range of options.
ld Fie vice r Se
Field Service
Siemens Field Service offers support with all aspects of commissioning and maintenance so that the availability of your machines and plants is assured whatever the case. www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ technical-support
Technical support
The competent consulting service for technical issues with a broad range of customer-oriented services for all our products and systems. www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ technical-support
Spare parts
Plants and systems in all sectors worldwide are expected to meet ever higher levels of availability. We can help you rule out unexpected stoppages with a global network and optimum logistics chains. www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ technical-support
13
Training
Extend your lead with practiserelated know-how straight from the manufacturer. www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ training
Specification texts
You can obtain qualified, free support to help you produce specifications for technically equipping non-residential and industrial buildings at www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/tender-specifications/en
13/18
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Comprehensive support from A to Z
Overview
Product information
Website Fast, targeted information on low-voltage power distribution: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage Newsletter Always up to date about our trend-setting products and systems: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
For more efficiency in meeting all your needs comprehensive support and round-the-clock access to proven tools quickly and easily via the Internet.
Product information/product & system selection

Information and Download Center Current catalogs, customer magazines, brochures, demo software and promotion packages: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial Industry Mall Comprehensive information and order platform for the Siemens Industry Basket: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall
Product & system engineering

SIMARIS software tools Support in planning and configuration the electrical power distribution: www.siemens.com/simaris ALPHA SELECT Simple and fast configuration for distribution boards engineering software and metre cabinets with products from the Siemens Industry Basket: www.siemens.com/alpha-select
Product documentation
Service & Support portal Comprehensive technical information - from planning to configuration and operation: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support CAx Data Collation of commercial and technical master product data: www.siemens.com/cax Image database Collection of product photographs and graphics, such as dimensional drawings and internal circuit diagrams: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/bilddb
Product training
SITRAIN portal Comprehensive training program about our products, systems and engineering tools: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/training
13
Product hotline
Technical Support Support for all technical queries about our products: E-mail: support.automation@siemens.com www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technicalsupport
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/19
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Software licenses
Overview
Software types Software requiring a license is categorised into types. The following software types have been defined: Engineering software Runtime software Engineering software This includes all software products for creating (engineering) user software, e.g. for configuring, programming, parameterising, testing, commissioning or servicing. Data generated with engineering software and executable programs can be duplicated for your own use or for use by thirdparties free-of-charge. Runtime software This includes all software products required for plant/machine operation, e.g. operating system, basic system, system expansions, drivers, etc. The duplication of the runtime software and executable programs created with the runtime software for your own use or for use by third-parties is subject to a charge. You can find information about license fees according to use in the ordering data (e.g. in the catalogue). Examples of categories of use include per CPU, per installation, per channel, per instance, per axis, per control loop, per variable, etc. Information about extended rights of use for parameterisation/configuration tools supplied as integral components of the scope of delivery can be found in the readme file supplied with the relevant product(s). License types Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies offers various types of software license: Floating license Single license Rental license Trial license Factory license Factory license With the Factory License the user has the right to install and use the software at one permanent establishment only. The permanent establishment is defined by one address only.The number of hardware devices on which the software may be installed results from the order data or the Certificate of License (CoL). Certificate of license The Certificate of License (CoL) is the licensee's proof that the use of the software has been licensed by Siemens. A CoL is required for every type of use and must be kept in a safe place. Downgrading The licensee is permitted to use the software or an earlier version/release of the software, provided that the licensee owns such a version/release and its use is technically feasible. Delivery versions Software is constantly being updated. The following delivery versions can be used to access updates: PowerPack Upgrade Existing bug fixes are supplied with the ServicePack version. PowerPack PowerPacks can be used to upgrade to more powerful software. The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL (Certificate of License) with the PowerPack. This CoL, together with the CoL for the original product, proves that the new software is licensed. A separate PowerPack must be purchased for each original license of the software to be replaced. Upgrade An upgrade permits the use of a new version of the software on the condition that a license for a previous version of the product is already held. The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL with the upgrade. This CoL, together with the CoL for the previous product, proves that the new version is licensed. A separate upgrade must be purchased for each original license of the software to be upgraded. ServicePack ServicePacks are used to debug existing products. ServicePacks may be duplicated for use as prescribed according to the number of existing original licenses. License key Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies supplies software products with and without license keys. The license key serves as an electronic license stamp and is also the "switch" for activating the software (floating license, rental license, etc.). The complete installation of software products requiring license keys includes the program to be licensed (the software) and the license key (which represents the license).
Detailed explanations concerning license conditions can be found in the Terms and Conditions of Siemens AG or at www.siemens.com/industrymall (Industry Mall Online-Help System)
13
Floating license The software may be installed for internal use on any number of devices by the licensee. Only the concurrent user is licensed. The concurrent user is the person using the program. Use begins when the software is started. A license is required for each concurrent user. Single license Unlike the floating license, a single license permits only one installation of the software. The type of use licensed is specified in the ordering data and in the Certificate of License (CoL). Types of use include for example per device, per axis, per channel, etc. One single license is required for each type of use defined. Rental license A rental license supports the "sporadic use" of engineering software. Once the license key has been installed, the software can be used for a specific number of hours (the operating hours do not have to be consecutive). One license is required for each installation of the software. Trial license A trial license supports "short-term use" of the software in a nonproductive context, e.g. for testing and evaluation purposes. It can be transferred to another license.
13/20
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Subject index
Numerics 1/4 turn screws............................................ 10/3 19" rack ................................................ 7/2, 7/12 Mounting kits .......................................... 7/12 A Accessories Fasteners - for electrical connections .................... 10/2 - for mechanical connections ................ 10/2 Miscellaneous parts.................... 10/3 ... 10/9 - Cable entries ....................................... 10/7 - Column ID plate................................... 10/3 - Door and special covers ......... 10/3 ... 10/5 - Electrical accessories.......................... 10/8 - Flange plates ....................................... 10/7 - Mechanical accessory parts ...... 10/5, 10/6 - Special covers ......................... 10/3 ... 10/5 - Tools..................................................... 10/9 Adapters ..................................................... 10/9 Air circuit breakers .......................... 8/10 ... 8/11 Air circuit breakers 3WL................................ 3/3 Assembly kits for ............................ 6/3 ... 6/5 Busbar systems ........................................ 3/3 Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure .................................................. 3/3 Delivery units for ....................................... 6/7 Internal separation.................................... 3/3 Kits for switchgear, busbar connection .... 3/3 Kits for switchgear, covers, modular mounting plates.......................... 3/3 Prefabricated assembly kits for ................ 6/6 Air-conditioning 8MR..................................... 9/2 Assembly kits Connecting bar set ................................... 5/8 Connecting lugs .................... 5/7 ... 5/8, 5/11 for 3K switch disconnectors ....... 6/26 ... 6/29 for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors................... 6/32 ... 6/34 for 3NJ6 in-line fuse switch disconnectors................... 6/35 ... 6/37 for 3NP switch disconnectors..... 6/30 ... 6/31 for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers .............................. 6/8 ... 6/21 - for horizontal installation with front cover....................... 6/11 ... 6/14 - for horizontal installation with modular door .................. 6/18 ... 6/20 - for vertical installation with front cover....................... 6/15 ... 6/17 - for vertical installation with modular door .............................. 6/21 for 3VT moulded case circuit breakers ........................... 6/22 ... 6/24 - for horizontal installation ...................... 6/23 - for vertical installation .......................... 6/24 for 3WL air circuit breakers............. 6/3 ... 6/5 for 8GK system - Adapters .............................................. 6/42 - Crossbars ............................................ 6/42 - Frame cover for contact protection cover ............... 6/42 - Mechanical dimensions .......... 11/21, 11/22 - Touch protection cover ........................ 6/42 - Uprights ............................................... 6/42 for 8GK4 system ......................... 6/41 ... 6/50 for modular devices.................... 6/38 ... 6/40 - SIKclip ................................................. 6/51 for protection and switching devices .......................... 6/2 ... 6/51 for vertical terminal blocks ..................... 6/44 Front cover for measuring instruments ... 6/44 Holder ..................................................... 5/11 Holders for distribution busbar system .. 5/10 Main busbar holder .................................. 5/7 Reinforcement for distribution busbar system ................ 5/10 Reinforcement for main busbar system .... 5/7 Support for distribution busbar system... 5/10 Upgrade for arcing fault protection........... 5/8 Assembly kits 8GK4 for 3NJ4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors ...................... 6/49 for 3NP4 in-line fuse switch disconnectors - for mounting on busbars ...................... 6/47 - for mounting on support plates............ 6/47 for 3VL moulded case circuit breakers ... 6/48 for bus-mounting fuse bases .................. 6/50 for empty sections................................... 6/46 for modular devices ................................ 6/43 for terminal blocks................................... 6/44 with mounting plates ............................... 6/45 B Bar guide..................................................... 10/4 Bar lock Coupling bar for ...................................... 10/4 Locking bar for........................................ 10/4 Base ................................................ 4/17 ... 4/18 Mechanical dimensions .......................... 11/4 Base compartment doors.............................. 7/6 Board coupling kit ....................................... 4/16 Bottom plates .............................................. 4/26 Bracket for cubicle reinforcement ........................ 10/6 Busbar ......................................................... 10/6 Busbar arrangement Mechanical dimensions ........................ 11/12 Busbar clamps ................................... 5/11, 10/2 Busbar connection fasteners ...................... 5/15 Busbar holders ............................................ 5/13 Busbar systems................................. 5/2 ... 5/15 Compact busbar systems........... 5/12 ... 5/14 Distribution busbar systems ......... 5/9 ... 5/11 Main busbar systems...................... 5/3 ... 5/8 Mechanical dimensions ............ 11/7 ... 11/11 Busbars Cover profile for ...................................... 5/14 Main busbar systems - Internal separation ...... 8/4 ... 8/6, 8/7 ... 8/9 Bus-mounting fuse bases Assembly kits 8GK4................................ 6/50 C Cable bracket.............................................. 10/5 Cable entries for flange plates ...................................... 10/7 Cable entry .................................................. 10/8 Check list for SIVACON S4 Planning and configuration ............ 12/4, 12/5 Circuit breaker 3VL .............................................. 8/16 ... 8/21 3WL ............................................. 8/10 ... 8/11 Moulded case circuit breakers 3VL - Mechanical dimensions ..................... 11/20 Column ID plate........................................... 10/3 Compact busbar systems ............... 5/12 ... 5/14 Configuration and planning Check list for SIVACON S4 ............ 12/4, 12/5 Correction factors ................................... 12/6 Example ................................................ 12/11 Internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards ..........12/8 ... 12/10 Procedure ............................................... 12/3 SIMARIS CFB .......................................... 12/2 Connecting panel for mounting plate.......... 7/11 Copper busbars .......................................... 5/14 Cordless screwdriver .................................. 10/9 Corner cubicle............................................. 4/15 Corner piece for fastening to cable bracket ................ 10/6 Correction factors Planning and configuration .................... 12/6 Coupling bar for bar lock............................ 10/4 Cover .................... 6/5, 6/11, 6/13 ... 6/17, 6/20, ........................ 6/21, 6/23, 6/24, 6/31, 6/34, 6/39 Cover profile for busbars ............................ 5/14 Covers.......................................... 7/2, 7/3 ... 7/4 Blanking covers...................................... 10/9 Internal ................................................... 4/20 Outer....................................................... 4/20 Terminal covers ...................................... 10/9 Crossbars .......................................... 8/14, 10/5 Cubicle Economic - with one section....................... 4/11 ... 4/12 - with subdivision into two sections ..................... 4/13 ... 4/14 for simple applications ............... 4/11 ... 4/14 Mechanical dimensions.......................... 11/2 Mechanical upgrade kit.......................... 4/14 Cubicle air-conditioning................................ 9/9 Cubicle and supporting structure with one section.............................. 4/4 ... 4/5 with subdivision into three sections 4/8 ... 4/9 with subdivision into two sections ............ 4/7 Cubicle connection....................................... 5/8 Cubicle doors with semi-cylindrical profile .................... 4/23 with two-way interlocking system ........... 4/22 Cubicle key ................................................. 10/5 Cubicle lamp............................................... 10/8 Cubicle panelling........................................ 4/21 Cubicle type Economic................................. 3/4 D Declaration of conformity SIVACON S4 power distribution boards .............. 2/7 ... 2/9 Degree of protection IP55 Upgrade ..................................... 7/6, 7/8, 7/9 Delivery units for 3WL air circuit breakers ...................... 6/7 Device compartment .................................. 6/37 Device holder.............................................. 6/34 Diagram pockets ........................................ 10/9 Distribution busbar systems ............ 5/9 ... 5/11, ............................................................. 8/7 ... 8/9 Partition..................................................... 8/9 Door hinge .................................................. 10/4 Door limit switch.......................................... 10/8 Door lock..................................................... 10/4 Doors Base compartment doors......................... 7/6 Double cubicle doors ............................. 4/24 Head compartment doors ........................ 7/6 Inner door ............................................... 4/25 Double cubicle doors ................................. 4/24 Duct connection Mechanical dimensions.......... 11/16 ... 11/19 E Earthing strip .............................................. 10/8 Economic Flange plates for cubicle type................ 10/7 Economic with 3VL moulded case circuit breakers Busbar systems........................................ 3/4 Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure.................................................. 3/4 Kits for switchgear, covers, modular mounting plates........................... 3/4
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/21
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Subject index
Electrical accessories ................................. 10/8 Electronic hygrostats .................................. 9/13 Electronic hygrotherms ............................... 9/14 Electronic thermostats ................................ 9/13 EMC filter fans............................................... 9/4 Empty sections Assembly kits 8GK4 ............................... 6/46 Enclosures ...................................... 4/19 ... 4/30 Mechanical dimensions.............. 11/4 ... 11/6 Example Configuration and planning .................. 12/11 F Fan heaters ................................................. 9/10 Fasteners for busbar connections........................... 5/15 for electrical connections ....................... 10/2 for mechanical connections ................... 10/2 Filter fan versions .......................................... 9/4 Fix thermostats............................................ 9/12 Flange plates .............................................. 10/7 Floor anchoring Mechanical dimensions.......................... 11/2 Front frame.................................................. 4/19 Fuse switch disconnectors 3NJ4, 3NJ6...... 8/21 H Head compartment doors............................. 7/6 Hinge Assembly kit ........................................... 10/3 Hinge for cover ............................................. 7/4 Hinge kit ...................................................... 10/3 Holder for distribution busbar ............................ 6/34 Hygrostats................................................... 9/12 Hygrotherms ............................................... 9/12 I ID strip......................................................... 10/5 In-line fuse switch disconnectors 3NJ4 Assembly kits 8GK4 ............................... 6/49 Assembly kits for ........................ 6/32 ... 6/34 In-line fuse switch disconnectors 3NJ6 Assembly kits for ........................ 6/35 ... 6/37 In-line fuse switch disconnectors 3NP4 Assembly kits 8GK4 ................... 6/47 ... 6/49 Inner door.................................................... 4/25 Inner door strut............................................ 10/5 Internal covers ............................................ 4/20 Internal separation ............................ 8/2 ... 8/21 Distribution busbar systems ........... 8/7 ... 8/9 - Partition.................................................. 8/9 Main busbar systems ..................... 8/4 ... 8/6 Protection and switching devices - 3NJ4, 3NJ6 .......................................... 8/21 - 3VL Rear connection.................... 8/17 ... 8/20 - 3VL, 3VT, 3K, 3NP.................... 8/12 ... 8/16 - 3WL.......................................... 8/10 ... 8/21 Internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards Planning and configuration.......... 12/8, 12/10 Introduction System Overview .......................... 2/2 ... 2/10 L Lifting bracket.............................................. 10/6 Lifting eyebolts ............................................ 10/6 Locking bar for bar lock .............................. 10/4 Low-voltage power distribution boards Internal temperature - Planning and configuration ....... 12/8, 12/10 M Main busbar systems ......... 5/3 ... 5/8, 8/4 ... 8/6 Mechanical dimensions Assembly kits for 8GK system ... 11/21, 11/22 Base ........................................................ 11/4 Busbar arrangement ............................. 11/12 Busbar systems ........................ 11/7 ... 11/11 Cubicle.................................................... 11/2 Duct connection...................... 11/16 ... 11/19 Enclosures .................................. 11/4 ... 11/6 Floor anchoring ....................................... 11/2 Moulded case circuit breakers 3VL with motorised operating mechanism....11/20 Mounting plates ......................... 11/13, 11/14 Terminal................................................. 11/12 Mechanical hygrostats ................................ 9/13 Mechanical thermostats .............................. 9/13 Miscellaneous parts ........................ 10/3 ... 10/9 Cable entries........................................... 10/7 Column ID plate ...................................... 10/3 Door and special covers............. 10/3 ... 10/5 Electrical accessories ............................. 10/8 Flange plates .......................................... 10/7 Mechanical accessory parts.......... 10/5, 10/6 Special covers ............................ 10/3 ... 10/5 Tools ........................................................ 10/9 Modular devices Assembly kits 8GK4................................ 6/43 Assembly kits for......................... 6/38 ... 6/40 - SIKclip .................................................. 6/51 Modular door ........................................ 6/5, 6/18 Modular doors ............................................... 7/2 Base compartment doors ......................... 7/6 Head compartment doors......................... 7/6 Modular doors/outer front covers Modular door............................................. 7/7 Outer front cover ....................................... 7/6 Moulded case circuit breaker ......... 8/16 ... 8/21 Moulded case circuit breakers 3VL ....... 3/2, 3/4 Assembly kits 8GK4................................ 6/48 Assembly kits for........................... 6/8 ... 6/21 - for horizontal installation with front cover ........................6/11 ... 6/14 - for horizontal installation with modular door....................6/18 ... 6/20 - for vertical installation with front cover ....................... 6/15 ... 6/17 - for vertical installation with modular door............................... 6/21 Busbar systems ........................................ 3/2 Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure ...................................................3/2 Kits for switchgear, busbar connection..... 3/2 Kits for switchgear, covers, modular mounting plates ...........................3/2 Mechanical dimensions ........................ 11/20 Moulded case circuit breakers 3VT Assembly kits for......................... 6/22 ... 6/24 - for horizontal installation ...................... 6/23 - for vertical installation .......................... 6/24 Mounting bracket............................... 10/5, 10/6 Mounting plate ............... 6/5, 6/11, 6/13 ... 6/21, .......................................... 6/23, 6/24, 6/31, 6/39 Cubicle-high ........................................... 6/45 Mounting plates ....................... 7/2, 7/10 ... 7/11 Assembly kits 8GK4 ............................... 6/45 Mechanical dimensions............. 11/13, 11/14 N N-Link.............................................. 6/18 ... 6/20 N-Link support ...................... 6/11, 6/13 ... 6/17, ............................................................ 6/20, 6/21 O Outer covers ............................................... 4/20 P Panels Rear panels ............................................ 4/29 Side panels............................................. 4/30 Partition ......................................................... 8/9 PEN jumper for main busbar system............................ 5/8 Planning and configuration Check list for SIVACON S4............ 12/4, 12/5 Correction factors................................... 12/6 Example................................................ 12/11 Internal temperature of low-voltage power distribution boards ........ 12/8 ... 12/10 Procedure ............................................... 12/3 SIMARIS CFB ......................................... 12/2 Plastic rivet.................................................. 10/6 Plates Bottom plates ......................................... 4/26 Top plates ................................... 4/27 ... 4/28 Plug-in rails ................................................. 8/14 Prefabricated assembly kits for 3WL air circuit breakers ...................... 6/6 Protection and switching devices 3NJ4, 3NJ6 - Fuse switch disconnectors .................. 8/21 - Internal separation............................... 8/21 - Rear connection .................................. 8/21 3VL - 3VL circuit breaker .................. 8/16 ... 8/21 - Rear connection ...................... 8/17 ... 8/20 Internal separation................... 8/17, 8/20 3VL, 3VT, 3K, 3NP ...................... 8/12 ... 8/16 - Internal separation...................... 8/12, 8/16 3WL - 3WL circuit breakers................ 8/10 ... 8/11 Assembly kits for .......................... 6/2 ... 6/51 Internal separation...................... 8/10 ... 8/21 Protection and switching devices and modular devices Busbar systems........................................ 3/5 Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure................................................... 3/5 Internal separation.................................... 3/5 Kits for switchgear, busbar connection .... 3/5 Kits for switchgear, covers, modular mounting plates.......................... 3/5 Protective bellows....................................... 8/17 PTC fan heaters .......................................... 9/11 R Rear panels................................................. 4/29 Rotary handle ............................................. 10/3
13
13/22
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Subject index
S Screws ........................................................ 10/2 Semiconductor heaters with thermostat ......................................... 9/9 without thermostat .................................... 9/9 Semi-cylindrical profile................................ 10/4 Separation.............................. 8/14 ... 8/16, 8/19 Side panels ................................................. 4/30 SIKclip Assembly kits for modular devices......... 6/51 SIMARIS CFB Planning and configuration..................... 12/2 Small thermostats ....................................... 9/12 Socket ......................................................... 10/8 Schuko.................................................... 10/8 Standard configurations Air circuit breakers 3WL ........................... 3/3 Cubicle type Economic with 3VL moulded case circuit breakers - Vertical distribution busbar at the rear .. 3/4 Moulded case circuit breakers 3VL - Vertical distribution busbar on the side............................................ 3/2 with protection and switching devices and modular devices................................. 3/5 Standard filter fans in EMC version............... 9/4 Stickers ....................................................... 10/9 Supporting structure for the internal separation form .............. 4/10 Supporting structure and cubicle with one section.............................. 4/4 ... 4/5 with subdivision into three sections .......................... 4/8 ... 4/9 with subdivision into two sections ..... 4/6, 4/7 Switch disconnector 3K Assembly kits for ........................ 6/26 ... 6/29 Switch disconnectors 3NP Assembly kits for ........................ 6/30 ... 6/31 Switching modules...................................... 9/14 System 8GK4 Assembly kits for ........................ 6/41 ... 6/50 System overview ........................................... 2/2 T Technical specifications SIVACON S4 power distribution boards ... 2/6 Terminal ....................................................... 8/17 Mechanical dimensions ........................ 11/12 Terminal blocks Assembly kits 8GK4................................ 6/44 Thermostats................................................. 9/12 Tools ............................................................ 10/9 Top plates ........................................ 4/27 ... 4/28 Touch protection................................. 6/21, 6/37 Twin thermostats.......................................... 9/13 U Universal mounting bracket ........................ 10/5 Upgrade Degree of protection IP55 ........... 7/6, 7/8, 7/9 V Vertical distribution busbar at the rear.................................................. 3/4 on the side ................................................ 3/2 W Washers....................................................... 10/2
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/23
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order number index including export markings
Overview
Order No. Page Export markings ECCN AL 8MR64 23-5E 6/34, 6/37 10/8 6/51 10/9 10/9 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/13 10/9 10/9 6/43 6/44 ... 45 6/44, 6/46 ... 47 6/47 6/48 ... 49 6/42, 6/50 7/4 ... 10/3 6/45 10/9 10/7 10/7 10/8 9/10 9/9 9/10 9/10 9/10 9/10 9/10 9/10 9/11 9/11 9/10 9/10 9/11 9/10 9/10 ... 11 9/12 ... 14 9/14 9/6 9/6 9/6 9/4 ... 5 9/4 ... 5 9/4 9/7 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N EAR99H EAR99H EAR99H EAR99 EAR99H EAR99 N N EAR99H EAR99 N N N N N N N N N N N On req. N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N On req. 8MR64 23-5L 8MR64 23-5M 8MR64 23-5S 8MR64 23-6 8MR64 4 8MR65 9/7 9/4 9/8 9/7 9/5 9/7 9/4 ... 5 4/14 4/17 ... 18 4/17 4/4, 4/15 4/4, 4/6, 4/8 4/4, 4/6, 4/8 4/4, 4/12, 4/15 ... 16 4/4, 4/6, 4/12 ... 13, 4/15 4/4, 4/6, 4/8, 4/12 ... 13, 4/15 4/25 4/20 4/19, 4/25, 6/34, 7/6 4/19, 4/25, 6/34, 7/6 7/3, 7/9 7/9 6/23, 7/3 ... 4, 7/9 7/3 ... 4, 7/9 7/6 7/6 7/7 7/8 7/3 6/14 6/14 6/39 7/7 7/8 7/6 6/19 ... 20 6/19 ... 20 6/23 6/23 6/11, 6/13 6/13 6/18 6/19 ... 20 6/19 ... 20 7/3 6/39 7/7 7/8 7/6 7/7 ... 8 6/11, 6/13 ... 14, 6/18 ... 20, 6/23, 6/29, 6/39 ... 40, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 Order No. Page Export markings ECCN On req. N On req. On req. N On req. N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AL On req. N On req. On req. N On req. N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
3NJ
3NJ
3SE
3SE
5ST
5ST2 5ST3
8G
8GD 8GF56 8GF57 3 8GF57 4 8GF57 5 8GF57 6 8GF7 8GF9 8GK43 8GK44 8GK45 8GK46 8GK47 8GK48 8GK91 8GK95 8GK99
8PQ1
8PQ10 0 8PQ10 1 8PQ10 2 8PQ12 00 8PQ12 01 8PQ12 02 8PQ12 04 8PQ12 06 8PQ12 08
8PQ2
8PQ20 00-1 8PQ20 00-2 8PQ20 00-6 8PQ20 00-8 8PQ20 05 8PQ20 10-4 8PQ20 10-6 8PQ20 10-8 8PQ20 15-4BA01 8PQ20 15-4BA03 8PQ20 15-4BA04 8PQ20 15-4BA05 8PQ20 15-6BA02 8PQ20 15-6BA04 8PQ20 15-6BA06 8PQ20 15-6BA07 8PQ20 15-6BA10 8PQ20 15-6BA12 8PQ20 15-6BA13 8PQ20 15-6BA14 8PQ20 15-6BA16 8PQ20 15-6BA17 8PQ20 15-6BA18 8PQ20 15-6BA21 8PQ20 15-6BA22 8PQ20 15-6BA23 8PQ20 15-6BA24 8PQ20 15-6BA25 8PQ20 15-8BA02 8PQ20 15-8BA03 8PQ20 15-8BA05 8PQ20 15-8BA07 8PQ20 15-8BA08 8PQ20 20-4 8PQ20 20-6
8H
8HC 8HP
8M
8MF 8MR21 2
13
8MR21 3 8MR21 40-0 8MR21 40-1 8MR21 40-2A 8MR21 40-2B 8MR21 40-3A 8MR21 40-3B 8MR21 40-3C 8MR21 40-3D 8MR21 40-4A 8MR21 40-4B 8MR21 40-5 8MR21 40-6 8MR21 5 8MR21 7 8MR21 8 8MR21 9 8MR60 8MR63 8MR64 0 8MR64 1 8MR64 23-2 8MR64 23-5D
13/24
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order No. 8PQ20 20-8 8PQ20 22 8PQ20 25 Page 6/11, 6/13 ... 14, 6/18 ... 20, 6/29, 6/39 ... 40, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 7/6 6/11, 6/13 ... 14, 6/18 ... 20, 6/23 ... 24, 6/29, 6/31, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 7/7 ... 8 6/11, 6/13 ... 14, 6/18 ... 20, 6/23, 6/29, 6/31, 6/39, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/14, 6/29, 6/31, 6/39, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 7/7 ... 8 6/11, 6/14 ... 16, 6/18 ... 20, 6/24 ... 25, 6/29, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/11, 6/13 ... 20, 6/29, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 10/5 7/7 ... 8 6/11, 6/15 ... 18, 6/21, 6/24 ... 25, 6/39, 7/3 ... 4, 7/7 ... 8 Export markings ECCN N N N AL N N N 8PQ21 97-1BA1 8PQ21 97-1BA2 8PQ21 97-2 8PQ21 97-4 8PQ21 97-6 N N N N 8PQ21 97-8 8PQ23 00-0 8PQ23 00-4 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 8PQ23 00-6 8PQ23 00-8 8PQ23 01-4BA01 8PQ23 01-4BA02 8PQ23 01-4BA03 8PQ23 01-4BA04 8PQ23 01-6 8PQ23 01-8 8PQ23 02-4BA01 8PQ23 02-4BA02 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 8PQ23 02-4BA03 8PQ23 02-4BA04 8PQ23 02-6BA01 8PQ23 02-6BA02 8PQ23 02-6BA03 8PQ23 02-6BA04 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 8PQ23 02-8 8PQ23 04-4BA01 8PQ23 04-4BA02 8PQ23 04-4BA03 8PQ23 04-4BA04 8PQ23 04-4BA05 8PQ23 04-4BA06 8PQ23 04-4BA08 8PQ23 04-4BA1 8PQ23 04-6 8PQ23 04-8 8PQ23 06-4BA01 8PQ23 06-4BA02 8PQ23 06-4BA03 8PQ23 06-4BA04 8PQ23 06-4BA05 8PQ23 06-4BA06 8PQ23 06-6BA01 8PQ23 06-6BA02 8PQ23 06-6BA03 8PQ23 06-6BA04 8PQ23 06-6BA05 8PQ23 06-6BA06 8PQ23 06-6BA08 8PQ23 06-6BA1 8PQ23 06-8 8PQ23 08-4BA01 8PQ23 08-4BA02 8PQ23 08-4BA03 8PQ23 08-4BA04 8PQ23 08-4BA05 4/22 ... 24 4/22 4/20, 4/24 4/20, 4/22 ... 23 4/21 ... 23, 6/42 4/21 ... 23 10/7 4/26 ... 28 4/26 ... 28 4/27 ... 28 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/27 ... 28 4/27 ... 28 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/27 ... 28 4/27 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/26 4/28 4/26, 4/28 4/27 ... 28 4/27 ... 28 4/27 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/26 4/27 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/26 4/28 4/26, 4/28 4/27 ... 28 4/27 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 Order No. Page Export markings ECCN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
8PQ20 30-4 8PQ20 30-6
8PQ20 30-8 8PQ20 35-4 8PQ20 35-6 8PQ20 35-8 8PQ20 40-0 8PQ20 40-4 8PQ20 40-6
8PQ20 40-8 8PQ20 45-4 8PQ20 45-6 8PQ20 45-8 8PQ20 50-4 8PQ20 50-6 8PQ20 50-8 8PQ20 55-0 8PQ20 55-4 8PQ20 55-6 8PQ20 55-8 8PQ20 60-0 8PQ20 60-4 8PQ20 60-6 8PQ20 60-8 8PQ20 65-4 8PQ20 65-6 8PQ20 65-8 8PQ20 70-0 8PQ20 70-4 8PQ20 70-6 8PQ20 70-8 8PQ20 72 8PQ20 75 8PQ20 80-0 8PQ20 80-4 8PQ20 80-6 8PQ20 80-8 8PQ20 9 8PQ21 97-0BA0 8PQ21 97-0BA1 8PQ21 97-0BA2 8PQ21 97-0BA3 8PQ21 97-0BA4 8PQ21 97-1BA0
6/11, 6/15 ... 18, 6/39, 7/3 ... 4, N 7/7 ... 8 7/7 ... 8 6/29, 6/39, 7/7 ... 8 6/11, 6/18 ... 19, 6/29, 6/39, 7/7 ... 8 7/7 ... 8 6/16 ... 17, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/14, 6/16 ... 17, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 10/5 6/5, 6/21, 7/7 ... 8 6/5, 6/29, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/5, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 10/5 7/7 ... 8 6/15, 6/17, 6/21, 6/39, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/39, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 7/7 ... 8 6/17, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 10/5 7/6 ... 8 6/15, 6/21, 7/6 ... 8 7/7 ... 8 7/6 ... 7 7/7 ... 8 10/5 7/7 ... 8 6/21, 6/34, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/34, 7/3, 7/7 ... 8 6/21 4/22 4/21 ... 22, 6/42, 10/5 4/22 4/23 4/23 4/22 ... 23 N N N
13
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/25
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order No. 8PQ23 08-4BA06 8PQ23 08-6BA01 8PQ23 08-6BA02 8PQ23 08-6BA03 8PQ23 08-6BA04 8PQ23 08-6BA05 8PQ23 08-6BA06 8PQ23 08-8BA01 8PQ23 08-8BA02 8PQ23 08-8BA03 8PQ23 08-8BA04 8PQ23 08-8BA05 8PQ23 08-8BA06 8PQ23 08-8BA07 8PQ23 08-8BA08 8PQ24 8PQ25 Page 4/26 4/27 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/26 4/26 4/27 4/27 4/27 4/28 4/28 4/28 4/28 4/26 4/29 4/30 4/5, 4/7, 4/9 8/9, 10/5 7/11, 10/5 10/5 8/5, 8/9 4/5, 4/7, 4/9, 4/12 ... 13, 8/5 8/5 ... 6, 10/5 ... 6 8/6, 8/14, 10/5 ... 6 7/11, 10/6 7/11 ... 12, 8/5 7/10, 8/5 ... 6, 10/5 4/4, 4/6 ... 10, 4/13, 7/10 6/37, 7/10, 8/5 7/10 6/42 6/42 8/6 7/10 7/10 7/10, 10/5 ... 6 6/42 7/10 ... 11, 8/9 7/10, 8/5 8/5 ... 6 7/11 8/6 5/7, 8/8 5/11 5/8 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/10 5/10 5/7, 5/10 5/11 Export markings ECCN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N On req. N N N N N N N N N N AL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N On req. N N N N N N N N N N 8PQ40 00-0BA4 8PQ40 00-0BA5 8PQ40 00-0BA60 8PQ40 00-0BA61 8PQ40 00-0BA62 8PQ40 00-0BA63 8PQ40 00-0BA64 8PQ40 00-0BA67 8PQ40 00-0BA70 8PQ40 00-0BA71 8PQ40 00-0BA72 8PQ40 00-0BA73 8PQ40 00-0BA75 8PQ40 00-0BA76 8PQ40 00-0BA77 8PQ40 00-0BA78 8PQ40 00-0BA80 8PQ40 00-0BA81 8PQ40 00-0BA82 8PQ40 00-0BA83 8PQ40 00-0BA84 8PQ40 00-0BA85 8PQ40 00-0BA86 8PQ40 00-0BA87 8PQ40 00-0BA88 8PQ40 00-1BA0 8PQ40 00-1BA10 8PQ40 00-1BA12 8PQ40 00-1BA13 8PQ40 00-1BA14 8PQ40 00-1BA15 8PQ40 00-1BA16 5/11 5/7 ... 8, 5/11 5/7 5/10 5/8 5/10 8/8 5/8 5/11 5/11 5/11 5/11 5/11 8/8 5/10 5/10 5/14 5/14 5/8 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/14 5/7 5/7 5/8 5/7 5/7 5/7 8/10, 8/16 8/10 ... 11 8/11 8/11 8/16 8/10 ... 11 8/15, 8/21 8/15 ... 16 8/16 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 ... 15 8/14 ... 15 8/15 8/15 6/21 8/14, 10/5 8/14, 8/18 8/18 8/18 ... 19 8/10 ... 11, 8/18 Order No. Page Export markings ECCN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
8PQ3
4/4, 4/6 ... 10, 4/13, 6/37, 8/21 N
13
8PQ30 00-1BA6 8PQ30 00-1BA7 8PQ30 00-1BA8 8PQ30 00-2BA0 8PQ30 00-2BA1 8PQ30 00-2BA2 8PQ30 00-2BA3 8PQ30 00-2BA4 8PQ30 00-2BA5 8PQ30 00-2BA6 8PQ30 00-2BA7 8PQ30 00-2BA8 8PQ30 00-3
8PQ5
8PQ50 00-0BA0 8PQ50 00-0BA1 8PQ50 00-0BA2 8PQ50 00-0BA3 8PQ50 00-0BA7 8PQ50 00-1BA6 8PQ50 00-1BA7 8PQ50 00-1BA8 8PQ50 00-2BA0 8PQ50 00-2BA2 8PQ50 00-2BA3 8PQ50 00-2BA4 8PQ50 00-2BA5 8PQ50 00-2BA6 8PQ50 00-2BA7 8PQ50 00-2BA8 8PQ50 00-3BA1 8PQ50 00-3BA4 8PQ50 00-3BA5 8PQ50 00-3BA6 8PQ50 00-3BA7 8PQ50 00-3BA8
8PQ4
8PQ40 00-0BA0 8PQ40 00-0BA11 8PQ40 00-0BA12 8PQ40 00-0BA17 8PQ40 00-0BA18 8PQ40 00-0BA2 8PQ40 00-0BA31 8PQ40 00-0BA32 8PQ40 00-0BA37 8PQ40 00-0BA38
13/26
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order No. 8PQ50 00-4 Page 8/11, 8/18 6/40 6/12 6/11, 6/13 ... 17, 6/19 ... 20, 6/29, 6/34 6/5, 6/11, 6/13 ... 21, 6/24, 6/31, 6/39 6/17 6/14 6/14, 6/23 ... 25 6/23 ... 25 6/11, 6/13 ... 14, 6/18 ... 20 6/12 6/12 6/12 6/14 6/21 6/11, 6/13, 6/19, 6/21 6/11, 6/13, 6/19 6/11, 6/13, 6/19 6/11, 6/13, 6/19 6/11, 6/18 ... 19 6/11, 6/18 ... 19 8/19 8/19 8/19 8/19 8/19 8/19 8/19 8/19 6/5 6/5 6/5 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/7 6/7, 6/31 6/31 Export markings ECCN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 8PQ60 00-5BA71 8PQ60 00-5BA72 8PQ60 00-5BA73 8PQ60 00-5BA74 8PQ60 00-5BA75 8PQ60 00-5BA76 8PQ60 00-5BA77 8PQ60 00-5BA78 8PQ60 00-5BA80 8PQ60 00-5BA81 8PQ60 00-5BA82 8PQ60 00-5BA83 8PQ60 00-5BA87 8PQ60 00-5BA88 8PQ60 00-6BA0 8PQ60 00-6BA1 8PQ60 00-6BA20 8PQ60 00-6BA21 8PQ60 00-6BA24 8PQ60 00-6BA25 8PQ60 00-6BA26 8PQ60 00-6BA27 8PQ60 00-6BA28 8PQ60 00-6BA30 8PQ60 00-6BA31 8PQ60 00-6BA32 8PQ60 00-6BA33 8PQ60 00-6BA34 8PQ60 00-6BA35 8PQ60 00-6BA36 8PQ60 00-6BA37 8PQ60 00-6BA38 8PQ60 00-6BA40 8PQ60 00-6BA41 8PQ60 00-6BA42 8PQ60 00-6BA43 8PQ60 00-6BA44 8PQ60 00-6BA45 8PQ60 00-6BA46 8PQ60 00-6BA47 8PQ60 00-6BA48 8PQ60 00-6BA50 8PQ60 00-6BA51 8PQ60 00-6BA52 8PQ60 00-6BA53 6/31 6/31 6/31 6/31 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 6/6 8/20 8/20 6/7, 8/20 6/7 6/7 6/7 8/20 8/20 8/20 6/18 6/19 6/18 6/19 6/20 6/20 6/18 6/19 6/18 6/19 6/20 6/20 6/18 ... 19 6/18 ... 19 6/20 6/18, 6/20 6/18, 6/20 6/18 ... 20 6/18, 6/20 6/18, 6/20 6/18, 6/20 6/21 6/40 6/40 10/5 5/11, 10/2 8/16 10/9 10/3, 13/9 10/3 10/3 10/9 10/6 Order No. Page Export markings ECCN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
8PQ6
8PQ60 00-0 8PQ60 00-1 8PQ60 00-2 8PQ60 00-3 8PQ60 00-4BA0 8PQ60 00-4BA1 8PQ60 00-4BA2 8PQ60 00-4BA3 8PQ60 00-4BA4 8PQ60 00-4BA51 8PQ60 00-4BA53 8PQ60 00-4BA55 8PQ60 00-4BA56 8PQ60 00-4BA6 8PQ60 00-4BA8 8PQ60 00-5BA00 8PQ60 00-5BA01 8PQ60 00-5BA02 8PQ60 00-5BA03 8PQ60 00-5BA04 8PQ60 00-5BA13 8PQ60 00-5BA14 8PQ60 00-5BA15 8PQ60 00-5BA17 8PQ60 00-5BA18 8PQ60 00-5BA20 8PQ60 00-5BA21 8PQ60 00-5BA22 8PQ60 00-5BA24 8PQ60 00-5BA25 8PQ60 00-5BA26 8PQ60 00-5BA3 8PQ60 00-5BA40 8PQ60 00-5BA41 8PQ60 00-5BA42 8PQ60 00-5BA43 8PQ60 00-5BA44 8PQ60 00-5BA45 8PQ60 00-5BA46 8PQ60 00-5BA47 8PQ60 00-5BA48 8PQ60 00-5BA50 8PQ60 00-5BA51 8PQ60 00-5BA52 8PQ60 00-5BA53 8PQ60 00-5BA54 8PQ60 00-5BA55 8PQ60 00-5BA56 8PQ60 00-5BA57 8PQ60 00-5BA58 8PQ60 00-5BA6 8PQ60 00-5BA70
13
8PQ9
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/27
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Order No. 8PQ94 00-0BA12 8PQ94 00-0BA14 8PQ94 00-0BA15 8PQ94 00-0BA16 8PQ94 00-0BA17 8PQ94 00-0BA21 8PQ94 00-0BA22 8PQ94 00-0BA26 8PQ94 00-0BA27 8PQ94 00-0BA28 8PQ94 00-0BA33 8PQ94 00-0BA35 8PQ94 00-0BA36 8PQ94 00-0BA37 8PQ94 00-0BA38 8PQ94 00-0BA4 8PQ94 00-0BA5 8PQ95 8PQ96 Page 10/5 10/2 10/8 10/8 10/3, 13/9 5/8 10/9 10/4 10/4 10/4 10/7 10/6 10/4 10/4 10/4 10/3 ... 4 10/3 ... 4, 10/6 10/2 10/6 5/13 ... 14 Export markings ECCN N N N N N N EAR99 N N N N N N N N N N N N N AL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
8US
8US
13
13/28
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Conditions of sale and delivery
Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery

By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the following terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the conditions for supplies and services, including software products, by any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Germany, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. The following terms apply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens AG. For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany The General Terms of Payment as well as the General Conditions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical and Electronics Industry shall apply. For software products, the General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office in Germany shall apply. For customers with a seat or registered office outside of Germany The General Terms of Payment as well as the General Conditions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany shall apply. For software products, the General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany shall apply. General The dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the German law on units in measuring technology, data in inches only apply to devices for export. Illustrations are not binding. Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages, - especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given these are subject to change without prior notice. The prices are in (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging. The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices. It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to the applicable legal regulations. Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit the prices valid at the time of delivery. Surcharges will be added to the prices of products that contain silver, copper, aluminum, lead and/or gold if the respective basic official prices for these metals are exceeded. These surcharges will be determined based on the official price and the metal factor of the respective product. The surcharge will be calculated on the basis of the official price on the day prior to receipt of the order or prior to the release order. The metal factor determines the official price as of which the metal surcharges are charged and the calculation method used. The metal factor, provided it is relevant, is included with the price information of the respective products. An exact explanation of the metal factor and the text of the Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are available in the Internet under: www.siemens.com/industrymall (Industry Mall Online-Help System)
Export regulations
Siemens shall not be obligated to fulfill this agreement if such fulfillment is prevented by any impediments arising out of national or international foreign trade or customs requirements or any embargoes or other sanctions. If you transfer goods (hardware and/ or software and/ or technology as well as corresponding documentation, regardless of the mode of provision) delivered by us or works and services (including all kinds of technical support) performed by us to a third party worldwide, you shall comply with all applicable national and international (re-) export control regulations. If required to conduct export control checks, you, upon request by us, shall promptly provide us with all information pertaining to particular end customer, destination and intended use of goods, works and services provided by us, as well as any export control restrictions existing. Purchaser shall indemnify and hold harmless Siemens from and against any claim, proceeding, action, fine, loss, cost and damages arising out of or relating to any noncompliance with export control regulations by Purchaser, and Purchaser shall compensate Siemens for all losses and expenses resulting thereof, unless such noncompliance was not caused by fault of the Purchaser. This provision does not imply a change in burden of proof. The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to European / German and/or US export regulations. Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval by the competent authorities. According to current provisions, the following export regulations must be observed with respect to the products featured in this catalog / price list:
AL Number of the German Export List Products marked other than N require an export license. In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to. Goods labeled with an AL not equal to N are subject to a European or German export authorization when being exported out of the EU. ECCN Export Control Classification Number Products marked other than N are subject to a reexport license to specific countries. In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to. Goods labeled with an ECCN not equal to N are subject to a US re-export authorization.
13
Even without a label or with an AL: N or ECCN: N, authorization may be required due to the final destination and purpose for which the goods are to be used. The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices. Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
Siemens LV 56 2011
13/29
Siemens AG 2012
Appendix
Notes
13
13/30
Siemens LV 56 2011
Siemens AG 2012
Catalogs
Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and Low-Voltage Power Distribution
Further information can be obtained from our branch offices listed in the appendix or at www.siemens.com/automation/partner
Interactive Catalog on DVD for Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and Low Voltage Distribution Drive Systems Variable-Speed Drives SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units SINAMICS GM150, SINAMICS SM150 Medium-Voltage Converters ROBICON Perfect Harmony Medium-Voltage Air-Cooled Drives Germany Edition SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units SINAMICS DCM Converter Units SINAMICS and Motors for Single-Axis Drives Three-phase Induction Motors H-compact H-compact PLUS Asynchronous Motors Standardline Synchronous Motors with Permanent-Magnet Technology, HT-direct DC Motors SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70 Digital Chassis Converters SIMOREG K 6RA22 Analog Chassis Converters PDF: SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RM70 Digital Converter Cabinet Units SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems SIEMOSYN Motors MICROMASTER 420/430/440 Inverters MICROMASTER 411/COMBIMASTER 411 SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE and Motors for Machine Tools SINUMERIK, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Machine Tools Low-Voltage Three-Phase-Motors IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors MOTOX Geared Motors Mechanical Driving Machines FLENDER Standard Couplings FLENDER SIG Standard industrial gear unit Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology SENTRON Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring Devices SIVACON ALPHA Switchboards and Distribution Systems Standards-Compliant Components for Photovoltaic Plants SIVACON Power Distribution Boards SIVACON S4 SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems GAMMA Building Control PDF: DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets LV 10.1 LV 10.2 LV 11 LV 56 LV 70 ET G1 ET D1 Catalog CA 01 Motion Control SINAMICS and Motors for Single-Axis Drives SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE Automation Systems for Machine Tools SINUMERIK & SINAMICS Equipment for Machine Tools SINUMERIK 828D BASIC T/BASIC M, SINAMICS S120 Combi and 1FK7/1PH8 motors SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines Drive and Control Components for Cranes Power Supply and System Cabling Power supply SITOP System cabling SIMATIC TOP connect Process Instrumentation and Analytics Field Instruments for Process Automation SIREC Recorders and Accessories SIPART, Controllers and Software Products for Weighing Technology PDF: Process Analytical Instruments PDF: Process Analytics, Components for the System Integration Safety Integrated Safety Technology for Factory Automation SIMATIC HMI/PC-based Automation Human Machine Interface Systems/ PC-based Automation SIMATIC Ident Industrial Identification Systems SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System PDF: Migration solutions with the SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication Catalog D 31 NC 60 NC 61 NC 82 PM 21 CR 1
D 11 D 12 D 15.1
D 21.3
KT 10.1 KT 10.2
D 23.1 D 31 D 84.1
D 86.1 D 86.2 DA 12 DA 21.1 DA 21.2 DA 22 DA 45 DA 48 DA 51.2 DA 51.3 DA 65.10 DA 65.11 DA 65.3 DA 65.4 PM 21 NC 60 NC 61
FI 01 MP 20 MP 31 WT 10 PA 01 PA 11
SI 10
ST 80/ ST PC
ID 10
ST 70 ST PCS 7 ST PCS 7.1 ST PCS 7.2
D 81.1 D 87.1 MD 10.1 MD 30.1
IK PI
SINVERT Photovoltaics Inverters and Components for Photovoltaic Installations RE 10 SIRIUS Industrial Controls SIRIUS Industrial Controls System Solutions Applications and Products for Industry are part of the interactive catalog CA 01
IC 10
Download-Center PDF: These catalogs are only available as pdf files. PDF versions of the catalogs are available on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial
Siemens AG 2012
Siemens AG Infrastructure & Cities Sector Low and Medium Voltage Division Low Voltage Distribution Postfach 10 09 53 93009 REGENSBURG GERMANY
Subject to change without prior notice Order No. E86060-K1856-A101-A1-7600 MP.R3.LV.0000.00.2.43 / Dispo 18302 KG 0412 0.2 DPG 240 En Printed in Germany Siemens AG 2012
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
The information provided in this catalogue contains descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

SIVACON LV56 Complete English 2011 PDF

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

SIVACON LV56 Complete English 2011 PDF

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Siemens AG 2012

Power Distribution Boards SIVACON S4

SIVACON Power Distribution Boards SIVACON S4

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure Busbar Systems

SIVACON 8MR System Air-Conditioning

Planning and Configuration

Universal, safe and intelligent power distribution

Much more than a catalogue. The Industry Mall.

Inner door Internal door/double door

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Kits for protection and switching devices, busbar connection

Kits for protection and switching devices, busbar connection

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Kits for protection and switching devices, busbar connection

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Cubicle, base, supporting structure, enclosure

Kits for protection and switching devices, busbar connection

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

4/4 4/6 4/8 4/10

4/11 4/13 4/14 4/15 4/16 4/17

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

8PQ3 000-1BA42 8PQ3 000-1BA36 8PQ3 000-1BA37

1 unit 1 unit 1 unit

Needed only for exterior intermediate upright for internal covers

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Frame Top plate

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Mechanical upgrade kits

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Corner cubicle conversion kits Height: 2000 mm

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Selection and ordering data

350 400 600 800 850 1000 1200

1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit

400 600 800

8PQ1 024-4BA01 8PQ1 026-6BA01 8PQ1 028-8BA01

1 unit 1 unit 1 unit

Cubicles, Supporting Structure and Enclosure

Transport with base and lift truck